WO2020135409A1

WO2020135409A1 - Video decoding method and apparatus, and decoding device

Info

Publication number: WO2020135409A1
Application number: PCT/CN2019/127872
Authority: WO
Inventors: 赵寅; 杨海涛; 张恋
Original assignee: 华为技术有限公司
Priority date: 2018-12-24
Filing date: 2019-12-24
Publication date: 2020-07-02

Abstract

Disclosed are a video decoding method and apparatus, and a decoding device. The method comprises: acquiring block information of the current image block; determining, according to the block information, whether division means in an optional division means set are available, wherein the optional division means set comprises a non-division means; determining, from the determined available division means, a division means for the current image block; obtaining, according to the division means for the current image block, one CU or a plurality of CUs from the current image block, wherein one CU is obtained from the current image block by applying the non-division means; and parsing a code stream including the current image block to acquire decoding information of the one CU or the plurality of CUs, and decoding the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block. By implementing the present application, when a division means for the current image block is acquired, by means of determining whether the division means is available, the transmission, in a code stream, of information of the division means is avoided to the greatest extent, thereby improving coding efficiency, and reducing the calculation complexity of video decoding.

Description

视频解码方法、装置及解码设备Video decoding method, device and decoding equipment

本申请要求于2018年12月24日提交中国专利局、申请号为201811584655.2的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 201811584655.2 submitted to the China Patent Office on December 24, 2018, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.

本申请要求于2019年3月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910222973.2、申请名称为“视频解码方法、装置及解码设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires the priority of the Chinese patent application filed on March 22, 2019 with the Chinese Patent Office, application number 201910222973.2, and the application name is "video decoding method, device and decoding device", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference in this application in.

技术领域Technical field

本申请涉及视频编码领域，尤其涉及一种视频解码方法、装置及解码设备。This application relates to the field of video encoding, and in particular to a video decoding method, device, and decoding device.

背景技术Background technique

视频编码(视频编码和解码)广泛用于数字视频应用，例如广播数字电视、互联网和移动网络上的视频传播、视频聊天和视频会议等实时会话应用、DVD和蓝光光盘、视频内容采集和编辑***以及可携式摄像机的安全应用。Video encoding (video encoding and decoding) is widely used in digital video applications, such as broadcast digital TV, video dissemination on the Internet and mobile networks, real-time conversation applications such as video chat and video conferencing, DVD and Blu-ray discs, video content acquisition and editing systems And security applications for camcorders.

随着1990年H.261标准中基于块的混合型视频编码方式的发展，新的视频编码技术和工具得到发展并为新的视频编码标准形成基础。其它视频编码标准包括MPEG-1视频、MPEG-2视频、ITU-T H.262/MPEG-2、ITU-T H.263、ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4第10部分高级视频编码(Advanced Video Coding，AVC)、ITU-T H.265/高效视频编码(High Efficiency Video Coding，HEVC)…以及此类标准的扩展，例如可扩展性和/或3D(three-dimensional)扩展。随着视频创建和使用变得越来越广泛，视频流量成为通信网络和数据存储的最大负担。因此大多数视频编码标准的目标之一是相较之前的标准，在不牺牲图片质量的前提下减少比特率。即使最新的HEVC可以在不牺牲图片质量的前提下比AVC大约多压缩视频一倍，仍然亟需新技术相对HEVC进一步压缩视频。With the development of block-based hybrid video coding methods in the H.261 standard in 1990, new video coding technologies and tools have been developed and formed the basis for new video coding standards. Other video coding standards include MPEG-1 video, MPEG-2 video, ITU-T H.262/MPEG-2, ITU-T H.263, ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4 Part 10 Advanced Video Coding ( Advanced Video Coding (AVC), ITU-T H.265/High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC)... and extensions of such standards, such as scalability and/or 3D (three-dimensional) extensions. As video creation and use become more and more widespread, video traffic becomes the biggest burden on communication networks and data storage. Therefore, one of the goals of most video coding standards is to reduce the bit rate without sacrificing picture quality compared to previous standards. Even though the latest HEVC can compress video about twice as much as AVC without sacrificing picture quality, there is still a need for new technologies to further compress video relative to HEVC.

在编码一帧图像时，首先将图像划分为等大小的图像块，称为最大编码单元(Largest Coding Unit，LCU)，再对一个LCU进行递归的划分操作，可以得到一个或多个编码单元(Coding Unit，CU)。LCU的形状有两种，128×128或64×64。现有编码标准在四叉树(Quad-Tree，QT)划分的基础上，增加了二叉树(Binary Tree，BT)划分方式(包括水平二分(Horizontal Binary Tree，HBT)和竖直二分(Vertical Binary Tree，VBT))和扩展四叉树(Extended Quad Tree，EQT)划分方式(包括水平扩展四分(Horizontal Extended Quad Tree，HEQT)和竖直扩展四分(Vertical Extended Quad Tree，VEQT))。When encoding a frame of image, first divide the image into equal-sized image blocks, called the largest coding unit (Largest Coding Unit, LCU), and then recursively divide an LCU to obtain one or more coding units ( Coding Unit, CU). There are two LCU shapes, 128×128 or 64×64. On the basis of the quad-tree (QT) division, the existing coding standards add a binary tree (BT) division method (including horizontal binary (Horizontal Binary Tree, HBT) and vertical binary (Vertical Binary Tree) , VBT) and Extended Quad Tree (EQT) division methods (including Horizontal Extended Extended Tree (HEQT) and Vertical Extended Extended Tree (VEQT)).

但是，在视频编码过程中若要确定一个图像块的划分方式，需要先计算多种划分方式对应的率失真代价(rate distortion cost，RD cost)，比较各个率失真代价后才能确定该图像块的最优划分方式，导致视频编码的计算复杂度过高。However, to determine the division method of an image block during the video encoding process, it is necessary to calculate the rate distortion cost (RD cost) corresponding to multiple division methods first, and then compare the rate distortion cost to determine the image block's cost. The optimal partitioning method leads to too high computational complexity of video encoding.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本申请实施例提供一种视频解码方法、装置及解码设备，在获取当前图像块的划分方式时，通过判断划分方式是否可用从而尽量避免在码流中传输划分方式的信息，提升了编码效率，并且降低了视频解码的计算复杂度。Embodiments of the present application provide a video decoding method, device, and decoding device. When obtaining the division method of the current image block, the judgment of whether the division method is available is used to avoid transmitting the information of the division method in the code stream as much as possible, thereby improving coding efficiency. And reduce the computational complexity of video decoding.

第一方面，本申请实施例提供一种视频解码方法，包括：获取当前图像块的块信息；根据块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，可选划分方式集合包括不划分方式；从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定当前图像块的划分方式；根据当前图像块的划分方式从当前图像块得到一个CU或多个CU，其中一个CU是应用不划分方式由当前图像块得到的；解析包含当前图像块的码流获取一个CU或多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a video decoding method, including: obtaining block information of a current image block; determining whether a division mode in an optional division mode set is available according to the block information, and the optional division mode set includes no division mode ; Determine the division of the current image block from the determined available divisions; obtain a CU or multiple CUs from the current image block according to the division of the current image block, where one CU is obtained by the current image block without applying division Parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of one CU or multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

本申请在获取当前图像块的划分方式时，通过判断划分方式是否可用从而尽量避免在码流中传输划分方式的信息，提升了编码效率，并且降低了视频解码的计算复杂度。When obtaining the division mode of the current image block, the present application tries to avoid the transmission of division mode information in the code stream by judging whether the division mode is available, which improves the coding efficiency and reduces the computational complexity of video decoding.

在一种可能的实现方式中，可选划分方式集合还包括水平二叉树HBT划分方式，垂直二叉树VBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和四叉树QT划分方式。In a possible implementation manner, the set of optional division methods further includes a horizontal binary tree HBT division method, a vertical binary tree VBT division method, a horizontally expanded quadtree HEQT division method, a vertically extended quadtree VEQT division method, and a quadtree QT division method Division method.

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据块信息确定不划分方式是否可用，包括：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第一判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第一判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则不划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第一判定条件集合中的所有条件，则不划分方式可用；In a possible implementation, determining whether the non-divided mode is available according to the block information includes: determining whether the current image block meets the conditions in the first determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the first determination condition set At least one condition of, the non-division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the first determination condition set, the non-division method is available;

其中，第一判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：The first set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为最大编码单元LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the largest coding unit LCU;

(2)当前图像块的长边与短边的比值大于maxAspectRatio，maxAspectRatio为大于等于1的整数；(2) The ratio of the long side to the short side of the current image block is greater than maxAspectRatio, and maxAspectRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(3)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的边界；(3) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(4)当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于等于16的整数；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than pipelineSize, pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(5)当前图像块的高大于pipelineSize，且宽小于pipelineSize。(5) The height of the current image block is larger than the pipelineSize, and the width is smaller than the pipelineSize.

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据块信息确定HBT划分方式是否可用，包括：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第二判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第二判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则HBT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第二判定条件集合中的所有条件，则HBT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation manner, determining whether the HBT division method is available according to the block information includes: determining whether the current image block satisfies the conditions in the second determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the second determination condition set At least one condition, the HBT division method is not available; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the second determination condition set, the HBT division method is available;

其中，第二判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：The second set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is I band or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of LCU;

(2)当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且当前图像块的宽大于K，高等于K，K包括128、64、32、16、8或4；(3) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width of the current image block is greater than K, and the height is equal to K, where K includes 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4;

(4)当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than or equal to pipelineSize, pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(5)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的右边界或右下边界；(5) The current image block exceeds the right or lower right border of the image where the current image block is located;

(6)当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于8的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 8;

(7)当前图像块的高等于最小CU边长；(7) The height of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length;

(8)当前图像块未超出当前图像块所在图像的边界，且当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the width and height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(9) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(10)当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(10) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据块信息确定VBT划分方式是否可用，包括：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第三判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第三判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则VBT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第三判定条件集合中的所有条件，则VBT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation, determining whether the VBT division method is available according to the block information includes: determining whether the current image block meets the conditions in the third determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the third determination condition set At least one of the conditions, the VBT division method is not available; if the current image block does not meet all the conditions in the third determination condition set, the VBT division method is available;

其中，第三判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Among them, the third set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(2)当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is M×128, M is a natural number less than 128;

(3)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的下边界或右下边界；(3) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary or lower right boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(4)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且当前图像块的宽等于K，高大于K，K包括128、64、32、16、8或4；(4) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width of the current image block is equal to K, and the height is greater than K, where K includes 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4;

(5)当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于1；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1;

(6)当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)当前图像块的宽等于最小CU边长；(7) The width of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length;

(8)当前图像块未超出当前图像块所在图像的边界，且当前图像块的高与宽的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the height and width of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)当前图像块的高大于pipelineSize，且宽小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数；(9) The height of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the width is less than or equal to pipelineSize, pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据块信息确定HEQT划分方式是否可用，包括：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第四判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第四判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则HEQT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第四判定条件集合中的所有条件，则HEQT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation, determining whether the HEQT division method is available according to the block information includes: determining whether the current image block meets the conditions in the fourth determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the fourth determination condition set At least one condition, the HEQT division method is not available; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the fourth determination condition set, the HEQT division method is available;

其中，第四判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Among them, the fourth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(3)当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(3) The size of the current image block is M×128, M is a natural number less than 128;

(4)当前图像块超过当前图像块所在图像的边界，且当前图像块的尺寸为128×N或M×128，M和N分别为小于128的自然数；(4) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the size of the current image block is 128×N or M×128, M and N are natural numbers less than 128, respectively;

(5)当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(6)当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxEQTSize，maxEQTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxEQTSize, and maxEQTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)当前图像块的高小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者宽等于minCUSize，minCUSize为最小CU边长；(7) The height of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the width is equal to minCUSize, minCUSize is the minimum CU side length;

(8)当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatioEQT，maxRatioEQT为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatioEQT, and maxRatioEQT is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的边界；(9) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据块信息确定VEQT划分方式是否可用，包括：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第五判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第五判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则VEQT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第五判定条件集合中的所有条件，则VEQT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation, determining whether the VEQT division method is available according to the block information includes: determining whether the current image block meets the conditions in the fifth determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the fifth determination condition set At least one condition, the VEQT division method is not available; if the current image block does not meet all the conditions in the fifth determination condition set, the VEQT division method is available;

其中，第五判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Among them, the fifth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(7)当前图像块的宽小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者高等于minCUSize，minCUSize为最小CU边长；(7) The width of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the height is equal to minCUSize, minCUSize is the minimum CU side length;

(8)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的边界；(8) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(9)当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(9) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据块信息确定QT划分方式是否可用，包括：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第六判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第六判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则QT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第六判定条件集合中的所有条件，则QT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation, determining whether the QT division method is available according to the block information includes: determining whether the current image block meets the conditions in the sixth determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the sixth determination condition set At least one condition of the QT division method is not available; if the current image block does not meet all the conditions in the sixth determination condition set, the QT division method is available;

其中，第六判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Among them, the sixth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(1) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(3) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(4)当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于；(4) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to;

(5)当前图像块的至少一个边长小于minQtSize，minQtSize为大于或等于4的整数；(5) At least one side length of the current image block is less than minQtSize, and minQtSize is an integer greater than or equal to 4;

(6)当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于0；(6) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than 0;

(7)当前图像块超过当前图像块所在图像的下边界或右边界。(7) The current image block exceeds the lower or right boundary of the image where the current image block is located.

在一种可能的实现方式中，从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定当前图像块的划分方式，包括：根据可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定当前图像块的划分方式；或者，解析码流以确定当前图像块的划分方式。In a possible implementation manner, determining the division mode of the current image block from the determined available division modes includes: determining the division mode of the current image block according to a determination result of whether division modes in the set of available division modes are available Or, parse the code stream to determine how the current image block is divided.

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定当前图像块的划分方式，包括：若QT划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则当前图像块的划分方式为QT划分方式；若QT划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析码流以确定当前图像块的划分方式。In a possible implementation manner, the division method of the current image block is determined according to the determination result of whether the division method in the optional division method set is available, including: if the QT division method is available, and the QT division is excluded from the optional division method set If all the division modes except the division mode are not available, the division mode of the current image block is the QT division mode; if the QT division mode is available and at least one division mode other than the QT division mode is available in the selectable division mode set, the code is parsed Stream to determine how the current image block is divided.

在一种可能的实现方式中，若QT划分方式不可用，则根据可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定当前图像块的划分方式，还包括：若不划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除不划分方式和QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则当前图像块的划分方式为不划分方式；若不划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除不划分方式和QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析码流以确定当前图像块的划分方式。In a possible implementation manner, if the QT division method is not available, the division method of the current image block is determined according to the judgment result of whether the division method in the set of optional division methods is available, and also includes: if no division method is available, and All division modes except the non-division mode and the QT division mode are not available in the optional division mode set, the current image block division mode is non-division mode; if no division mode is available, and the optional division mode set is not At least one division mode other than the division mode and the QT division mode is available, the code stream is parsed to determine the division mode of the current image block.

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据当前图像块的划分方式从当前图像块得到一个CU或多个CU，包括：当当前图像块的划分方式为不划分方式时，当前图像块为一个CU；当当前图像块的划分方式为可选划分方式集合中除不划分方式外的任一划分方式时，根据当前图像块的划分方式对当前图像块进行划分，若划分得到的子块的至少一个边长为T，T为4或8，则子块为一个CU，否则对子块继续划分。In a possible implementation manner, obtaining one CU or multiple CUs from the current image block according to the division method of the current image block includes: when the division mode of the current image block is not division mode, the current image block is one CU; When the division mode of the current image block is any division mode other than the non-division mode in the set of selectable division modes, the current image block is divided according to the division mode of the current image block, if at least one edge of the obtained sub-block is divided If the length is T, and T is 4 or 8, the sub-block is a CU, otherwise, the sub-block is further divided.

第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种视频解码方法，包括：获取当前图像块的块信息；根据块信息确定当前图像块的默认划分方式；对当前图像块采用默认划分方式进行划分得到多个编码单元CU；解析包含当前图像块的码流获取多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a video decoding method, including: acquiring block information of a current image block; determining a default division method of the current image block according to the block information; dividing the current image block by the default division method to obtain multiple Coding unit CU; parsing the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of multiple CUs, and decoding the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

本申请在获取当前图像块的划分方式时，使用默认方式对当前图像块进行划分，从而避免在码流中传输划分方式的信息，提升了编码效率，并且降低了视频解码的计算复杂度。When obtaining the division method of the current image block, the present application divides the current image block by default, thereby avoiding transmitting the information of the division mode in the code stream, improving coding efficiency, and reducing the computational complexity of video decoding.

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据块信息确定当前图像块的默认划分方式，包括：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第七判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第七判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则默认划分方式为四叉树QT划分方式；In a possible implementation, determining the default division method of the current image block according to the block information includes: determining whether the current image block meets the conditions in the seventh determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the seventh determination condition If there is at least one condition in the set, the default division mode is the quadtree QT division mode;

其中，第七判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Among them, the seventh set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的右下边界；(1) The current image block exceeds the lower right border of the image where the current image block is located;

(2)当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且当前图像块的宽和高分别等于maxLCU，maxLCU包括64、128或者256。(2) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to maxLCU, which includes 64, 128, or 256, respectively.

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据块信息确定当前图像块的默认划分方式，包括：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第八判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第八判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则默认划分方式为垂直二叉树VBT划分方式；In a possible implementation, determining the default division method of the current image block according to the block information includes: determining whether the current image block meets the conditions in the eighth determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the eighth determination condition If there is at least one condition in the set, the default division method is the vertical binary tree VBT division method;

其中，第八判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Among them, the eighth judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且当前图像块的宽和高不满足：宽等于K，高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not meet: width equals K, height equals L, K is less than L, and K and L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively , The current image block is forced to use VBT division;

(2)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且当前图像块的宽和高满足：宽等于K，高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: width equal to K, height equal to L, K greater than L, K and L are integers greater than or equal to 32, The current image block is forced to use the VBT division method.

在一种可能的实现方式中，根据块信息确定当前图像块的默认划分方式，包括：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第九判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第九判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则默认划分方式为水平二叉树HBT划分方式；In a possible implementation, determining the default division method of the current image block according to the block information includes: determining whether the current image block meets the conditions in the ninth determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the ninth determination condition If there is at least one condition in the set, the default division method is the horizontal binary tree HBT division method;

其中，第九判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Among them, the ninth determination condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且当前图像块的宽和高不满足：宽等于K，高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not meet: width equals K, height equals L, K is greater than L, and K and L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively , The current image block is forced to use HBT division;

(2)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且当前图像块的宽和高满足：宽等于K，高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: width equal to K, height equal to L, K less than L, K and L are integers greater than or equal to 32, The current image block is forced to use HBT division.

在一种可能的实现方式中，获取当前图像块的块信息之后，还包括：根据块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，可选划分方式集合包括VBT划分方式，HBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和QT划分方式；从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定当前图像块的划分方式；对当前图像块采用当前图像块的划分方式进行划分得到多个CU；解析码流获取多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。In a possible implementation manner, after obtaining the block information of the current image block, the method further includes: determining whether the division modes in the optional division mode set are available according to the block information, and the optional division mode set includes a VBT division mode and an HBT division mode , The horizontal expansion quadtree HEQT division method, the vertical expansion quadtree VEQT division method and the QT division method; the current image block division method is determined from the determined available division methods; the current image block division is adopted for the current image block Divide into multiple CUs by way of analysis; parse the code stream to obtain decoding information of multiple CUs, and decode the CUs according to the decoding information to obtain reconstructed blocks.

第三方面，本申请实施例提供一种视频解码装置，包括：In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a video decoding device, including:

获取模块，用于获取当前图像块的块信息；判断模块，用于根据块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，可选划分方式集合包括不划分方式；确定模块，用于从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定当前图像块的划分方式；划分模块，用于根据当前图像块的划分方式从当前图像块得到一个CU或多个CU，其中一个CU是应用不划分方式由当前图像块得到的；解码模块，用于解析包含当前图像块的码流获取一个CU或多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。The acquisition module is used to obtain the block information of the current image block; the judgment module is used to determine whether the division modes in the set of optional division modes are available according to the block information, and the set of optional division modes includes no division mode; the determination module is used to Determine the division mode of the current image block from the available division modes determined; the division module is used to obtain one CU or multiple CUs from the current image block according to the division mode of the current image block, where one CU is applied without division mode by the current The image block is obtained; the decoding module is used to parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of one CU or multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

在一种可能的实现方式中，判断模块，具体用于根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第一判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第一判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则不划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第一判定条件集合中的所有条件，则不划分方式可用；In a possible implementation manner, the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the first judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the first judgment condition set, then The non-division mode is not available; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the first determination condition set, the non-division mode is available;

在一种可能的实现方式中，判断模块，具体用于根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第二判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第二判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则HBT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第二判定条件集合中的所有条件，则HBT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation, the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the second judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the second judgment condition set, then The HBT division method is not available; if the current image block does not meet all the conditions in the second judgment condition set, the HBT division method is available;

在一种可能的实现方式中，判断模块，具体用于根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第三判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第三判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则VBT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第三判定条件集合中的所有条件，则VBT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation, the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the third judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the third judgment condition set, then The VBT division method is not available; if the current image block does not meet all the conditions in the third judgment condition set, the VBT division method is available;

在一种可能的实现方式中，判断模块，具体用于根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第四判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第四判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则HEQT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第四判定条件集合中的所有条件，则HEQT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation manner, the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the fourth judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the fourth judgment condition set, then The HEQT division method is not available; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the fourth determination condition set, the HEQT division method is available;

在一种可能的实现方式中，判断模块，具体用于根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第五判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第五判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则VEQT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第五判定条件集合中的所有条件，则VEQT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation manner, the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the fifth judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the fifth judgment condition set, then The VEQT division method is not available; if the current image block does not meet all the conditions in the fifth judgment condition set, the VEQT division method is available;

(4)当前图像块超过当前图像块所在图像的边界，且当前图像块的尺寸为128×N或 M×128，M和N分别为小于128的自然数；(4) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the size of the current image block is 128×N or M×128, M and N are natural numbers less than 128, respectively;

在一种可能的实现方式中，判断模块，具体用于根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第六判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第六判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则QT划分方式不可用；若当前图像块不满足第六判定条件集合中的所有条件，则QT划分方式可用；In a possible implementation manner, the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the sixth judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the sixth judgment condition set, then The QT division method is not available; if the current image block does not meet all the conditions in the sixth judgment condition set, the QT division method is available;

在一种可能的实现方式中，确定模块，具体用于根据可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定当前图像块的划分方式；或者，解析码流以确定当前图像块的划分方式。In a possible implementation manner, the determination module is specifically configured to determine the division mode of the current image block according to the judgment result of whether the division mode in the set of optional division modes is available; or, parse the code stream to determine the division of the current image block the way.

在一种可能的实现方式中，确定模块，具体用于若QT划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则当前图像块的划分方式为QT划分方式；若QT划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析码流以确定当前图像块的划分方式。In a possible implementation, the determination module is specifically used if the QT division mode is available, and all division modes except the QT division mode in the set of optional division modes are unavailable, the division mode of the current image block is QT Division mode; if QT division mode is available, and at least one division mode other than QT division mode is available in the selectable division mode set, the code stream is parsed to determine the division mode of the current image block.

在一种可能的实现方式中，若QT划分方式不可用，则确定模块，还用于若不划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除不划分方式和QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则当前图像块的划分方式为不划分方式；若不划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除不划分方式和QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析码流以确定当前图像块的划分方式。In a possible implementation, if the QT division method is not available, the determination module is also used to determine whether the division method is available, and all division methods in the set of optional division methods except the non-division method and the QT division method are If it is not available, the current image block is divided into non-divided modes; if no divided mode is available, and at least one division mode other than the undivided mode and the QT division mode is available in the set of optional division modes, the code stream is parsed to determine How to divide the current image block.

在一种可能的实现方式中，划分模块，具体用于当当前图像块的划分方式为不划分方式时，当前图像块为一个CU；当当前图像块的划分方式为可选划分方式集合中除不划分方式外的任一划分方式时，根据当前图像块的划分方式对当前图像块进行划分，若划分得到的子块的至少一个边长为T，T为4或8，则子块为一个CU，否则对子块继续划分。In a possible implementation, the dividing module is specifically used when the current image block is divided into non-divided modes, the current image block is a CU; when the current image block is divided into a set of optional division modes When there is no division method other than the division method, the current image block is divided according to the division method of the current image block. If at least one side length of the divided sub-block is T, T is 4 or 8, then the sub-block is one CU, otherwise continue to divide the sub-block.

第四方面，本申请实施例提供一种视频解码装置，包括：According to a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a video decoding device, including:

获取模块，用于获取当前图像块的块信息；默认模块，用于根据块信息确定当前图像块的默认划分方式；划分模块，用于对当前图像块采用默认划分方式进行划分得到多个编码单元CU；解码模块，用于解析包含当前图像块的码流获取多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。The acquisition module is used to acquire the block information of the current image block; the default module is used to determine the default division mode of the current image block according to the block information; the division module is used to divide the current image block by the default division mode to obtain multiple coding units CU; decoding module, used to parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

在一种可能的实现方式中，默认模块，具体用于根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第七判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第七判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则默认划分方式为四叉树QT划分方式；In a possible implementation, the default module is specifically used to determine whether the current image block meets the conditions in the seventh determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the seventh determination condition set, then The default division mode is the quadtree QT division mode;

在一种可能的实现方式中，默认模块，具体用于根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第八判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第八判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则默认划分方式为垂直二叉树VBT划分方式；In a possible implementation, the default module is specifically used to determine whether the current image block meets the conditions in the eighth determination condition set based on the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the eighth determination condition set, then The default division method is the vertical binary tree VBT division method;

在一种可能的实现方式中，默认模块，具体用于根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第九判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第九判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则默认划分方式为水平二叉树HBT划分方式；In a possible implementation, the default module is specifically used to determine whether the current image block meets the conditions in the ninth determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the ninth determination condition set, then The default division method is the horizontal binary tree HBT division method;

在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：判断模块，用于根据块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，可选划分方式集合包括VBT划分方式，HBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和QT划分方式；确定模块，用于从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定当前图像块的划分方式；划分模块，还用于对当前图像块采用当前图像块的划分方式进行划分得到多个CU；解码模块，还用于解析码流获取多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: a judgment module, configured to determine whether the division methods in the optional division method set are available according to the block information. The optional division method set includes a VBT division method, an HBT division method, and a horizontal expansion method. Fork tree HEQT division, vertical expansion quadtree VEQT division and QT division; determination module, used to determine the division of the current image block from the available divisions determined; division module, also used for the current image The block is divided by the current image block division method to obtain multiple CUs; the decoding module is also used to parse the code stream to obtain decoding information of multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

第五方面，本申请实施例提供一种用于解码视频数据的设备，所述设备包括：According to a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an apparatus for decoding video data. The apparatus includes:

存储器，用于存储码流形式的视频数据；Memory, used to store video data in the form of code stream;

视频解码器，用于获取当前图像块的块信息；根据块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，可选划分方式集合包括不划分方式；从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定当前图像块的划分方式；根据当前图像块的划分方式从当前图像块得到一个CU或多个CU，其中一个CU是应用不划分方式由当前图像块得到的；解析包含当前图像块的码流获取一个或多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。The video decoder is used to obtain the block information of the current image block; according to the block information, determine whether the division modes in the optional division mode set are available, and the optional division mode set includes no division mode; determine from the determined available division modes The current image block's division method; according to the current image block's division method, one CU or multiple CUs are obtained from the current image block, one of the CUs is obtained from the current image block without division; the code stream containing the current image block is obtained by parsing Decode information of one or more CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

第六方面，本申请实施例提供一种视频解码设备，包括：相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器，所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行第一或二方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤。According to a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a video decoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, and the processor calls program codes stored in the memory to perform the first or second aspect Part or all of the steps of any method.

第七方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储了程序代码，其中，所述程序代码包括用于执行第一或二方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤的指令。According to a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a program code, where the program code includes a method for performing any method of the first or second aspect Instructions for some or all steps.

第八方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行第一或二方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to perform part or all of the steps of any one of the methods of the first or second aspect.

应当理解的是，本申请的第二至八方面与本申请的第一方面的技术方案一致，各方面及对应的可行实施方式所取得的有益效果相似，不再赘述。It should be understood that the second to eighth aspects of the present application are consistent with the technical solution of the first aspect of the present application, and the beneficial effects obtained by the various aspects and the corresponding feasible implementation manners are similar and will not be repeated.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION

为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例或背景技术中的技术方案，下面将对本申请实施例或背景技术中所需要使用的附图进行说明。In order to more clearly explain the technical solutions in the embodiments or the background technology of the present application, the drawings required in the embodiments or the background technology of the present application will be described below.

图1A是用于实现本申请实施例的视频编码及解码***10实例的框图；FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an example of a video encoding and decoding system 10 for implementing embodiments of the present application;

图1B是用于实现本申请实施例的视频译码***40实例的框图；FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an example of a video decoding system 40 for implementing embodiments of the present application;

图2是用于实现本申请实施例的编码器20实例结构的框图；2 is a block diagram of an example structure of an encoder 20 for implementing an embodiment of the present application;

图3是用于实现本申请实施例的解码器30实例结构的框图；3 is a block diagram of an example structure of a decoder 30 for implementing an embodiment of the present application;

图4是用于实现本申请实施例的视频译码设备400实例的框图；4 is a block diagram of an example of a video decoding device 400 for implementing an embodiment of the present application;

图5是用于实现本申请实施例的另一种编码装置或解码装置实例的框图；5 is a block diagram of another example of an encoding device or a decoding device used to implement an embodiment of the present application;

图6是用于实现本申请实施例的二叉树，四叉树以及扩展四叉树的划分方式示意图；6 is a schematic diagram of a division manner for implementing a binary tree, a quad tree, and an extended quad tree according to an embodiment of the present application;

图7是用于实现本申请实施例的QT-MTT划分示意图；7 is a schematic diagram of QT-MTT division used to implement the embodiment of the present application;

图8是用于实现本申请实施例的一种视频解码方法的一个流程示意图；8 is a schematic flowchart of a video decoding method for implementing an embodiment of the present application;

图9是用于实现本申请实施例的一种视频解码方法的另一个流程示意图；9 is another schematic flowchart of a video decoding method for implementing an embodiment of the present application;

图10是用于实现本申请实施例的一种视频解码装置的一个结构框图；10 is a structural block diagram of a video decoding device for implementing an embodiment of the present application;

图11是用于实现本申请实施例的一种视频解码装置的另一个结构框图；11 is another structural block diagram of a video decoding device for implementing an embodiment of the present application;

图12是用于实现本申请实施例的一种视频解码装置的再一个结构框图。FIG. 12 is another structural block diagram of a video decoding device for implementing an embodiment of the present application.

具体实施方式detailed description

下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。以下描述中，参考形成本公开一部分并以说明之方式示出本申请实施例的具体方面或可使用本申请实施例的具体方面的附图。应理解，本申请实施例可在其它方面中使用，并可包括附图中未描绘的结构或逻辑变化。因此，以下详细描述不应以限制性的意义来理解，且本申请的范围由所附权利要求书界定。例如，应理解，结合所描述方法的揭示内容可以同样适用于用于执行所述方法的对应设备或***，且反之亦然。例如，如果描述一个或多个具体方法步骤，则对应的设备可以包含如功能单元等一个或多个单元，来执行所描述的一个或多个方法步骤(例如，一个单元执行一个或多个步骤，或多个单元，其中每个都执行多个步骤中的一个或多个)，即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个单元。另一方面，例如，如果基于如功能单元等一个或多个单元描述具体装置，则对应的方法可以包含一个步骤来执行一个或多个单元的功能性(例如，一个步骤执行一个或多个单元的功能性，或多个步骤，其中每个执行多个单元中一个或多个单元的功能性)，即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个步骤。进一步，应理解的是，除非另外明确提出，本文中所描述的各示例性实施例和/或方面的特征可以相互组合。The following describes the embodiments of the present application with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. In the following description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings that form a part of the present disclosure and illustrate specific aspects of the embodiments of the present application by way of illustration or may use specific aspects of the embodiments of the present application. It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application may be used in other aspects, and may include structural or logical changes not depicted in the drawings. Therefore, the following detailed description should not be interpreted in a restrictive sense, and the scope of the present application is defined by the appended claims. For example, it should be understood that the disclosure in conjunction with the described method may be equally applicable to the corresponding device or system for performing the method, and vice versa. For example, if one or more specific method steps are described, the corresponding device may include one or more units such as functional units to perform the one or more method steps described (eg, one unit performs one or more steps , Or multiple units, each of which performs one or more of multiple steps), even if such one or more units are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings. On the other hand, for example, if a specific device is described based on one or more units such as a functional unit, the corresponding method may include a step to perform the functionality of one or more units (eg, one step executes one or more units Functionality, or multiple steps, each of which performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units), even if such one or more steps are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings. Further, it should be understood that, unless expressly stated otherwise, the features of the exemplary embodiments and/or aspects described herein may be combined with each other.

本申请实施例所涉及的技术方案不仅可能应用于现有的视频编码标准中(如H.264、高性能视频编码(High Efficiency Video Coding，HEVC)等标准)，还可能应用于未来的视频编码标准中(如H.266标准)，或者可能应用于在数字音视频编解码(Audio Video coding Standard Workgroup of China，AVS)技术标准，如AVS3中。本发明的实施方式部分使用的术语仅用于对本发明的具体实施例进行解释，而非旨在限定本发明。下面先对本申请实施例可能涉及的一些概念进行简单介绍。The technical solutions involved in the embodiments of the present application may not only be applied to existing video coding standards (such as H.264, High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC), and other standards), but may also be applied to future video coding In the standard (such as H.266 standard), or may be used in the digital audio and video codec (Audio Video Coding Standard Workgroup of China, AVS) technical standards, such as AVS3. The terms used in the embodiment of the present invention are only used to explain specific examples of the present invention and are not intended to limit the present invention. The following briefly introduces some concepts that may be involved in the embodiments of the present application.

视频编码通常是指处理形成视频或视频序列的图片序列。在视频编码领域，术语“图片(picture)”、“帧(frame)”或“图像(image)”可以用作同义词。本文中使用的视频编码表示视频编码或视频解码。视频编码在源侧执行，通常包括处理(例如，通过压缩)原始视频图片以减少表示该视频图片所需的数据量，从而更高效地存储和/或传输。视频解码在目的地侧执行，通常包括相对于编码器作逆处理，以重构视频图片。实施例涉及的视频图片“编码”应理解为涉及视频序列的“编码”或“解码”。编码部分和解码部分的组合也称为编解码(编码和解码)。Video coding generally refers to processing a sequence of pictures that form a video or video sequence. In the field of video coding, the terms "picture", "frame" or "image" may be used as synonyms. Video coding as used herein means video coding or video decoding. Video encoding is performed on the source side, and usually includes processing (eg, by compressing) the original video picture to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, thereby storing and/or transmitting more efficiently. Video decoding is performed on the destination side and usually involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video picture. The “encoding” of video pictures involved in the embodiments should be understood as referring to the “encoding” or “decoding” of video sequences. The combination of the encoding part and the decoding part is also called codec (encoding and decoding).

视频序列包括一系列图像(picture)，图像被进一步划分为切片(slice)，切片再被划分为块(block)。视频编码以块为单位进行编码处理，在一些新的视频编码标准中，块的概念被进一步扩展。比如，在H.264标准中有宏块(macroblock，MB)，宏块可进一步划分成多个可用于预测编码的预测块(partition)。在高性能视频编码(high efficiency video coding，HEVC)标准中，采用编码单元(coding unit，CU)，预测单元(prediction unit，PU)和变换单元(transform unit，TU)等基本概念，从功能上划分了多种块单元，并采用全新的基于树结构进行描述。比如视频编码标准把一帧图像分割成互不重叠的编码树单元(Coding Tree Unit，CTU)，再把一个CTU划分为若干个子节点，这些子节点可以按照四叉树(Quad Tree，QT)进行划分为更小的子节点，而更小的子节点还可以继续划分，从而形成一种四叉树结构。如果节点不再划分，则叫做CU。CU是对编码图像进行划分和编码的基本单元。对于PU和TU也有类似的树结构，PU可以对应预测块，是预测编码的基本单元。对CU按照划分模式进一步划分成多个PU。TU可以对应变换块，是对预测残差进行变换的基本单元。然而，无论CU，PU还是TU，本质上都属于块(或称图像块)的概念。The video sequence includes a series of pictures, which are further divided into slices, and the slices are further divided into blocks. Video coding is performed in units of blocks. In some new video coding standards, the concept of blocks is further expanded. For example, in the H.264 standard, there is a macroblock (macroblock, MB), which can be further divided into multiple prediction blocks that can be used for predictive coding. In the high-efficiency video coding (HEVC) standard, basic concepts such as coding unit (CU), prediction unit (PU) and transform unit (TU) are adopted. A variety of block units are divided, and a new tree-based structure is used for description. For example, the video coding standard divides a frame of image into non-overlapping coding tree units (Coding Tree Unit, CTU), and then divides a CTU into several sub-nodes. These sub-nodes can be processed according to a quad tree (QT) It is divided into smaller child nodes, and the smaller child nodes can continue to be divided to form a quadtree structure. If the node is no longer divided, it is called CU. The CU is the basic unit for dividing and coding the coded image. There is a similar tree structure for PU and TU. PU can correspond to the prediction block and is the basic unit of predictive coding. The CU is further divided into multiple PUs according to the division mode. The TU can correspond to the transform block and is the basic unit for transforming the prediction residual. However, regardless of CU, PU or TU, they all belong to the concept of block (or image block) in essence.

例如在HEVC中，通过使用表示为编码树的四叉树结构将CTU拆分为多个CU。在CU层级处作出是否使用图片间(时间)或图片内(空间)预测对图片区域进行编码的决策。每个CU可以根据PU拆分类型进一步拆分为一个、两个或四个PU。一个PU内应用相同的预测过程，并在PU基础上将相关信息传输到解码器。在通过基于PU拆分类型应用预测过程获取残差块之后，可以根据类似于用于CU的编码树的其它四叉树结构将CU分割TU。在视频压缩技术最新的发展中，使用四叉树和二叉树(Quad-tree and binary tree，QTBT)分割帧来分割编码块。在QTBT块结构中，CU可以为正方形或矩形形状。For example, in HEVC, the CTU is split into multiple CUs by using a quadtree structure represented as a coding tree. A decision is made at the CU level whether to use inter-picture (temporal) or intra-picture (spatial) prediction to encode picture regions. Each CU can be further split into one, two, or four PUs according to the PU split type. The same prediction process is applied within a PU, and related information is transmitted to the decoder on the basis of the PU. After obtaining the residual block by applying the prediction process based on the PU split type, the CU may be divided into TUs according to other quadtree structures similar to the coding tree used for the CU. In the latest development of video compression technology, quad-tree and binary-tree (Quad-tree and binary tree, QTBT) split frames are used to split the coding blocks. In the QTBT block structure, the CU may have a square or rectangular shape.

本文中，为了便于描述和理解，可将当前编码图像中待编码的图像块称为当前块，例如在编码中，指当前正在编码的块；在解码中，指当前正在解码的块。将参考图像中用于对当前块进行预测的已解码的图像块称为参考块，即参考块是为当前块提供参考信号的块，其中，参考信号表示图像块内的像素值。可将参考图像中为当前块提供预测信号的块为预测块，其中，预测信号表示预测块内的像素值或者采样值或者采样信号。例如，在遍历多个参考块以后，找到了最佳参考块，此最佳参考块将为当前块提供预测，此块称为预测块。Here, for ease of description and understanding, the image block to be encoded in the current encoded image may be referred to as the current block. For example, in encoding, it refers to the block currently being encoded; in decoding, it refers to the block currently being decoded. The decoded image block used to predict the current block in the reference image is referred to as a reference block, that is, the reference block is a block that provides a reference signal for the current block, where the reference signal represents a pixel value within the image block. The block in the reference image that provides the prediction signal for the current block may be a prediction block, where the prediction signal represents a pixel value or a sample value or a sample signal within the prediction block. For example, after traversing multiple reference blocks, the best reference block is found. This best reference block will provide a prediction for the current block. This block is called a prediction block.

无损视频编码情况下，可以重构原始视频图片，即经重构视频图片具有与原始视频图片相同的质量(假设存储或传输期间没有传输损耗或其它数据丢失)。在有损视频编码情况下，通过例如量化执行进一步压缩，来减少表示视频图片所需的数据量，而解码器侧无法完全重构视频图片，即经重构视频图片的质量相比原始视频图片的质量较低或较差。In the case of lossless video coding, the original video picture can be reconstructed, that is, the reconstructed video picture has the same quality as the original video picture (assuming no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission). In the case of lossy video encoding, further compression is performed by, for example, quantization to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, but the decoder side cannot fully reconstruct the video picture, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video picture is better than the original video picture. The quality is lower or worse.

H.261的几个视频编码标准属于“有损混合型视频编解码”(即，将样本域中的空间和时间预测与变换域中用于应用量化的2D变换编码结合)。视频序列的每个图片通常分割成不重叠的块集合，通常在块层级上进行编码。换句话说，编码器侧通常在块(视频块)层级处理亦即编码视频，例如，通过空间(图片内)预测和时间(图片间)预测来产生预测块，从当前块(当前处理或待处理的块)减去预测块以获取残差块，在变换域变换残差块并量化残差块，以减少待传输(压缩)的数据量，而解码器侧将相对于编码器的逆处理部分应用于经编码或经压缩块，以重构用于表示的当前块。另外，编码器复制解码器处理循环，使得编码器和解码器生成相同的预测(例如帧内预测和帧间预测)和/或重构，用于处理亦即编码后续块。Several video coding standards of H.261 belong to "lossy hybrid video codec" (ie, combining spatial and temporal prediction in the sample domain with 2D transform coding for applying quantization in the transform domain). Each picture of a video sequence is usually divided into non-overlapping block sets, which are usually encoded at the block level. In other words, the encoder side usually processes the encoded video at the block (video block) level. For example, the prediction block is generated by spatial (intra-picture) prediction and temporal (inter-picture) prediction. From the current block (current processing or pending) Processed block) subtract the prediction block to obtain the residual block, transform the residual block in the transform domain and quantize the residual block to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted (compressed), and the decoder side will perform inverse processing relative to the encoder Partially applied to coded or compressed blocks to reconstruct the current block for representation. In addition, the encoder duplicates the decoder processing loop so that the encoder and decoder generate the same prediction (eg, intra prediction and inter prediction) and/or reconstruction for processing, ie, encoding subsequent blocks.

下面描述本申请实施例所应用的***架构。参见图1A，图1A示例性地给出了本申请实施例所应用的视频编码及解码***10的示意性框图。如图1A所示，视频编码及解码***10可包括源设备12和目的地设备14，源设备12产生经编码视频数据，因此，源设备12可被称为视频编码装置。目的地设备14可对由源设备12所产生的经编码的视频数据进行解码，因此，目的地设备14可被称为视频解码装置。源设备12、目的地设备14或两个的各种实施方案可包含一或多个处理器以及耦合到所述一或多个处理器的存储器。所述存储器可包含但不限于RAM、ROM、EEPROM、快闪存储器或可用于以可由计算机存取的指令或数据结构的形式存储所要的程序代码的任何其它媒体，如本文所描述。源设备12和目的地设备14可以包括各种装置，包含桌上型计算机、移动计算装置、笔记型(例如，膝上型)计算机、平板计算机、机顶盒、例如所谓的“智能”电话等电话手持机、电视机、相机、显示装置、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏控制台、车载计算机、无线通信设备或其类似者。The system architecture applied in the embodiments of the present application is described below. Referring to FIG. 1A, FIG. 1A exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a video encoding and decoding system 10 applied in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1A, the video encoding and decoding system 10 may include a source device 12 and a destination device 14, the source device 12 generates encoded video data, and therefore, the source device 12 may be referred to as a video encoding device. The destination device 14 may decode the encoded video data generated by the source device 12, and therefore, the destination device 14 may be referred to as a video decoding device. Various implementations of source device 12, destination device 14, or both may include one or more processors and memory coupled to the one or more processors. The memory may include, but is not limited to, RAM, ROM, EEPROM, flash memory, or any other medium that can be used to store the desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures accessible by the computer, as described herein. Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include various devices, including desktop computers, mobile computing devices, notebook (eg, laptop) computers, tablet computers, set-top boxes, telephone handsets such as so-called "smart" phones, etc. Devices, televisions, cameras, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, in-vehicle computers, wireless communication devices, or the like.

虽然图1A将源设备12和目的地设备14绘示为单独的设备，但设备实施例也可以同时包括源设备12和目的地设备14或同时包括两者的功能性，即源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。在此类实施例中，可以使用相同硬件和/或软件，或使用单独的硬件和/或软件，或其任何组合来实施源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。Although FIG. 1A illustrates the source device 12 and the destination device 14 as separate devices, device embodiments may also include the functionality of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie the source device 12 or the corresponding Functionality of the destination device 14 or the corresponding functionality. In such embodiments, the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality may be implemented using the same hardware and/or software, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof .

源设备12和目的地设备14之间可通过链路13进行通信连接，目的地设备14可经由链路13从源设备12接收经编码视频数据。链路13可包括能够将经编码视频数据从源设备12移动到目的地设备14的一或多个媒体或装置。在一个实例中，链路13可包括使得源设备12能够实时将经编码视频数据直接发射到目的地设备14的一或多个通信媒体。在此实例中，源设备12可根据通信标准(例如无线通信协议)来调制经编码视频数据，且可将经调制的视频数据发射到目的地设备14。所述一或多个通信媒体可包含无线和/或有线通信媒体，例如射频(RF)频谱或一或多个物理传输线。所述一或多个通信媒体可形成基于分组的网络的一部分，基于分组的网络例如为局域网、广域网或全球网络(例如，因特网)。所述一或多个通信媒体可包含路由器、交换器、基站或促进从源设备12到目的地设备14的通信的其它设备。The communication connection between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may be via a link 13, and the destination device 14 may receive the encoded video data from the source device 12 via the link 13. Link 13 may include one or more media or devices capable of moving encoded video data from source device 12 to destination device 14. In one example, link 13 may include one or more communication media that enable source device 12 to transmit encoded video data directly to destination device 14 in real time. In this example, the source device 12 may modulate the encoded video data according to a communication standard (eg, a wireless communication protocol), and may transmit the modulated video data to the destination device 14. The one or more communication media may include wireless and/or wired communication media, such as a radio frequency (RF) spectrum or one or more physical transmission lines. The one or more communication media may form part of a packet-based network, such as a local area network, a wide area network, or a global network (eg, the Internet). The one or more communication media may include routers, switches, base stations, or other devices that facilitate communication from source device 12 to destination device 14.

源设备12包括编码器20，另外可选地，源设备12还可以包括图片源16、图片预处理器18、以及通信接口22。具体实现形态中，所述编码器20、图片源16、图片预处理器18、以及通信接口22可能是源设备12中的硬件部件，也可能是源设备12中的软件程序。分别描述如下：The source device 12 includes an encoder 20. Alternatively, the source device 12 may further include a picture source 16, a picture pre-processor 18, and a communication interface 22. In a specific implementation form, the encoder 20, the picture source 16, the picture pre-processor 18, and the communication interface 22 may be hardware components in the source device 12, or may be software programs in the source device 12. They are described as follows:

图片源16，可以包括或可以为任何类别的图片捕获设备，用于例如捕获现实世界图片，和/或任何类别的图片或评论(对于屏幕内容编码，屏幕上的一些文字也认为是待编码的图片或图像的一部分)生成设备，例如，用于生成计算机动画图片的计算机图形处理器，或用于获取和/或提供现实世界图片、计算机动画图片(例如，屏幕内容、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)图片)的任何类别设备，和/或其任何组合(例如，实景(augmented reality，AR)图片)。图片源16可以为用于捕获图片的相机或者用于存储图片的存储器，图片源16还可以包括存储先前捕获或产生的图片和/或获取或接收图片的任何类别的(内部或外部)接口。当图片源16为相机时，图片源16可例如为本地的或集成在源设备中的集成相机；当图片源16为存储器时，图片源16可为本地的或例如集成在源设备中的集成存储器。当所述图片源16包括接口时，接口可例如为从外部视频源接收图片的外部接口，外部视频源例如为外部图片捕获设备，比如相机、外部存储器或外部图片生成设备，外部图片生成设备例如为外部计算机图形处理器、计算机或服务器。接口可以为根据任何专有或标准化接口协议的任何类别的接口，例如有线或无线接口、光接口。Picture source 16, which can include or can be any type of picture capture device, for example to capture real-world pictures, and/or any type of picture or comment (for screen content encoding, some text on the screen is also considered to be encoded Part of the picture or image) generation device, for example, a computer graphics processor for generating computer animation pictures, or for acquiring and/or providing real-world pictures, computer animation pictures (for example, screen content, virtual reality, VR) pictures) in any category of equipment, and/or any combination thereof (eg, augmented reality (AR) pictures). The picture source 16 may be a camera for capturing pictures or a memory for storing pictures. The picture source 16 may also include any type of (internal or external) interface that stores previously captured or generated pictures and/or acquires or receives pictures. When the picture source 16 is a camera, the picture source 16 may be, for example, a local or integrated camera integrated in the source device; when the picture source 16 is a memory, the picture source 16 may be a local or integrated, for example, integrated in the source device Memory. When the picture source 16 includes an interface, the interface may be, for example, an external interface that receives pictures from an external video source. The external video source is, for example, an external picture capture device, such as a camera, an external memory, or an external picture generation device. The external picture generation device, for example It is an external computer graphics processor, computer or server. The interface may be any type of interface according to any proprietary or standardized interface protocol, such as a wired or wireless interface, an optical interface.

其中，图片可以视为像素点(picture element)的二维阵列或矩阵。阵列中的像素点也可以称为采样点。阵列或图片在水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上的采样点数目定义图片的尺寸和/或分辨率。为了表示颜色，通常采用三个颜色分量，即图片可以表示为或包含三个采样阵列。例如在RBG格式或颜色空间中，图片包括对应的红色、绿色及蓝色采样阵列。但是，在视频编码中，每个像素通常以亮度/色度格式或颜色空间表示，例如对于YUV格式的图片，包括Y指示的亮度分量(有时也可以用L指示)以及U和V指示的两个色度分量。亮度(luma)分量Y表示亮度或灰度水平强度(例如，在灰度等级图片中两者相同)，而两个色度(chroma)分量U和V表示色度或颜色信息分量。相应地，YUV格式的图片包括亮度采样值(Y)的亮度采样阵列，和色度值(U和V)的两个色度采样阵列。RGB格式的图片可以转换或变换为YUV格式，反之亦然，该过程也称为色彩变换或转换。如果图片是黑白的，该图片可以只包括亮度采样阵列。本申请实施例中，由图片源16传输至图片处理器的图片也可称为原始图片数据17。The picture can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of picture elements. The pixels in the array can also be called sampling points. The number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the array or picture defines the size and/or resolution of the picture. In order to represent colors, three color components are usually used, that is, a picture can be represented or contain three sampling arrays. For example, in the RBG format or color space, the picture includes corresponding red, green, and blue sampling arrays. However, in video coding, each pixel is usually expressed in a luminance/chrominance format or color space. For example, for a picture in YUV format, it includes the luminance component indicated by Y (sometimes also indicated by L) and the two indicated by U and V. Chroma components. The luma component Y represents luminance or gray-scale horizontal intensity (for example, both are the same in gray-scale pictures), and the two chroma components U and V represent chroma or color information components. Accordingly, the picture in the YUV format includes a luminance sampling array of luminance sampling values (Y), and two chrominance sampling arrays of chrominance values (U and V). RGB format pictures can be converted or transformed into YUV format and vice versa, this process is also called color transformation or conversion. If the picture is black and white, the picture may include only the brightness sampling array. In the embodiment of the present application, the picture transmitted from the picture source 16 to the picture processor may also be referred to as original picture data 17.

图片预处理器18，用于接收原始图片数据17并对原始图片数据17执行预处理，以获取经预处理的图片19或经预处理的图片数据19。例如，图片预处理器18执行的预处理可以包括整修、色彩格式转换(例如，从RGB格式转换为YUV格式)、调色或去噪。The picture pre-processor 18 is configured to receive the original picture data 17 and perform pre-processing on the original picture data 17 to obtain the pre-processed picture 19 or the pre-processed picture data 19. For example, the pre-processing performed by the picture pre-processor 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (eg, conversion from RGB format to YUV format), color grading, or denoising.

编码器20(或称视频编码器20)，用于接收经预处理的图片数据19，采用相关预测模式(如本文各个实施例中的预测模式)对经预处理的图片数据19进行处理，从而提供经编码图片数据21(下文将进一步基于图2或图4或图5描述编码器20的结构细节)。通信接口22，可用于接收经编码图片数据21，并可通过链路13将经编码图片数据21传输至目的地设备14或任何其它设备(如存储器)，以用于存储或直接重构，所述其它设备可为任何用于解码或存储的设备。通信接口22可例如用于将经编码图片数据21封装成合适的格式，例如数据包，以在链路13上传输。The encoder 20 (or video encoder 20) is used to receive the pre-processed picture data 19, and process the pre-processed picture data 19 in a related prediction mode (such as the prediction mode in various embodiments herein), thereby The encoded picture data 21 is provided (the structural details of the encoder 20 will be further described below based on FIG. 2 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5). The communication interface 22 can be used to receive the encoded picture data 21, and can transmit the encoded picture data 21 to the destination device 14 or any other device (such as a memory) via the link 13 for storage or direct reconstruction. The other device may be any device used for decoding or storage. The communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to encapsulate the encoded picture data 21 into a suitable format, such as a data packet, for transmission on the link 13.

目的地设备14包括解码器30，另外可选地，目的地设备14还可以包括通信接口28、图片后处理器32和显示设备34。分别描述如下：The destination device 14 includes a decoder 30, and optionally, the destination device 14 may further include a communication interface 28, a post-picture processor 32, and a display device 34. They are described as follows:

通信接口28，可用于从源设备12或任何其它源接收经编码图片数据21，所述任何其它源例如为存储设备，存储设备例如为经编码图片数据存储设备。通信接口28可以用于藉由源设备12和目的地设备14之间的链路13或藉由任何类别的网络传输或接收经编码图片数据21，链路13例如为直接有线或无线连接，任何类别的网络例如为有线或无线网络或其任何组合，或任何类别的私网和公网，或其任何组合。通信接口28可以例如用于解封装通信接口22所传输的数据包以获取经编码图片数据21。The communication interface 28 may be used to receive the encoded picture data 21 from the source device 12 or any other source, such as a storage device, such as an encoded picture data storage device. The communication interface 28 can be used to transmit or receive the encoded picture data 21 through the link 13 between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or through any type of network. The link 13 is, for example, a direct wired or wireless connection. A network of a category is, for example, a wired or wireless network or any combination thereof, or a private network and a public network of any category, or any combination thereof. The communication interface 28 may be used, for example, to decapsulate the data packet transmitted by the communication interface 22 to obtain the encoded picture data 21.

通信接口28和通信接口22都可以配置为单向通信接口或者双向通信接口，以及可以用于例如发送和接收消息来建立连接、确认和交换任何其它与通信链路和/或例如经编码图片数据传输的数据传输有关的信息。Both the communication interface 28 and the communication interface 22 may be configured as a one-way communication interface or a two-way communication interface, and may be used, for example, to send and receive messages to establish a connection, confirm and exchange any other communication link and/or for example encoded picture data Information about data transmission.

解码器30(或称为解码器30)，用于接收经编码图片数据21并提供经解码图片数据31或经解码图片31(下文将进一步基于图3或图4或图5描述解码器30的结构细节)。在一些实施例中，解码器30可以用于执行后文所描述的各个实施例，以实现本申请所描述的视频解码方法在解码侧的应用。The decoder 30 (or referred to as the decoder 30) is used to receive the encoded picture data 21 and provide the decoded picture data 31 or the decoded picture 31 (hereinafter, the decoder 30 will be further described based on FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 Structural details). In some embodiments, the decoder 30 may be used to execute various embodiments described below to implement the application of the video decoding method described in this application on the decoding side.

图片后处理器32，用于对经解码图片数据31(也称为经重构图片数据)执行后处理，以获得经后处理图片数据33。图片后处理器32执行的后处理可以包括：色彩格式转换(例如，从YUV格式转换为RGB格式)、调色、整修或重采样，或任何其它处理，还可用于将将经后处理图片数据33传输至显示设备34。The post-picture processor 32 is configured to perform post-processing on the decoded picture data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed picture data) to obtain post-processed picture data 33. The post-processing performed by the image post-processor 32 may include: color format conversion (for example, conversion from YUV format to RGB format), color adjustment, retouching or resampling, or any other processing, and may also be used to convert the post-processed image data 33transmitted to the display device 34.

显示设备34，用于接收经后处理图片数据33以向例如用户或观看者显示图片。显示设备34可以为或可以包括任何类别的用于呈现经重构图片的显示器，例如，集成的或外部的显示器或监视器。例如，显示器可以包括液晶显示器(liquid crystal display，LCD)、有机发光二极管(organic light emitting diode，OLED)显示器、等离子显示器、投影仪、微LED显示器、硅基液晶(liquid crystal on silicon，LCoS)、数字光处理器(digital light processor，DLP)或任何类别的其它显示器。The display device 34 is used to receive post-processed picture data 33 to display pictures to, for example, a user or a viewer. The display device 34 may be or may include any type of display for presenting reconstructed pictures, for example, an integrated or external display or monitor. For example, the display may include a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS), Digital light processor (digital light processor, DLP) or any other type of display.

虽然，图1A将源设备12和目的地设备14绘示为单独的设备，但设备实施例也可以同时包括源设备12和目的地设备14或同时包括两者的功能性，即源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。在此类实施例中，可以使用相同硬件和/或软件，或使用单独的硬件和/或软件，或其任何组合来实施源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。Although FIG. 1A illustrates the source device 12 and the destination device 14 as separate devices, device embodiments may also include the functionality of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie, the source device 12 or The corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality. In such embodiments, the same hardware and/or software may be used, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality .

本领域技术人员基于描述明显可知，不同单元的功能性或图1A所示的源设备12和/或目的地设备14的功能性的存在和(准确)划分可能根据实际设备和应用有所不同。源设备12和目的地设备14可以包括各种设备中的任一个，包含任何类别的手持或静止设备，例如，笔记本或膝上型计算机、移动电话、智能手机、平板或平板计算机、摄像机、台式计算机、机顶盒、电视机、相机、车载设备、显示设备、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏控制台、视频流式传输设备(例如内容服务服务器或内容分发服务器)、广播接收器设备、广播发射器设备等，并可以不使用或使用任何类别的操作***。It is obvious to those skilled in the art based on the description that the existence and (accurate) division of the functionality of different units or the functionality of the source device 12 and/or the destination device 14 shown in FIG. 1A may vary according to actual devices and applications. Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary devices, such as notebook or laptop computers, mobile phones, smartphones, tablets or tablet computers, cameras, desktops Computers, set-top boxes, televisions, cameras, in-vehicle devices, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (such as content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiver devices, broadcast transmitter devices And so on, and can not use or use any kind of operating system.

编码器20和解码器30都可以实施为各种合适电路中的任一个，例如，一个或多个微处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array，FPGA)、离散逻辑、硬件或其任何组合。如果部分地以软件实施所述技术，则设备可将软件的指令存储于合适的非暂时性计算机可读存储介质中，且可使用一或多个处理器以硬件执行指令从而执行本公开的技术。前述内容(包含硬件、软件、硬件与软件的组合等)中的任一者可视为一或多个处理器。Both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 can be implemented as any of various suitable circuits, for example, one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application-specific integrated circuits (application-specific integrated circuits) circuit, ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), discrete logic, hardware, or any combination thereof. If the techniques are partially implemented in software, the device may store the instructions of the software in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, and may use one or more processors to execute the instructions in hardware to perform the techniques of the present disclosure . Any one of the foregoing (including hardware, software, a combination of hardware and software, etc.) may be regarded as one or more processors.

在一些情况下，图1A中所示视频编码及解码***10仅为示例，本申请的技术可以适用于不必包含编码和解码设备之间的任何数据通信的视频编码设置(例如，视频编码或视频解码)。在其它实例中，数据可从本地存储器检索、在网络上流式传输等。视频编码设备可以对数据进行编码并且将数据存储到存储器，和/或视频解码设备可以从存储器检索数据并且对数据进行解码。在一些实例中，由并不彼此通信而是仅编码数据到存储器和/或从存储器检索数据且解码数据的设备执行编码和解码。In some cases, the video encoding and decoding system 10 shown in FIG. 1A is only an example, and the technology of the present application may be applied to video encoding settings that do not necessarily include any data communication between encoding and decoding devices (eg, video encoding or video decoding). In other examples, data can be retrieved from local storage, streamed on the network, and so on. The video encoding device may encode the data and store the data to the memory, and/or the video decoding device may retrieve the data from the memory and decode the data. In some examples, encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other but only encode data to and/or retrieve data from memory and decode the data.

参见图1B，图1B是根据一示例性实施例的包含图2的编码器20和/或图3的解码器30的视频译码***40的实例的说明图。视频译码***40可以实现本申请实施例的各种技术的组合。在所说明的实施方式中，视频译码***40可以包含成像设备41、编码器20、解码器30(和/或藉由逻辑电路47实施的视频编/解码器)、天线42、一个或多个处理器43、一个或多个存储器44和/或显示设备45。Referring to FIG. 1B, FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of an example of a video coding system 40 including the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and/or the decoder 30 of FIG. 3, according to an exemplary embodiment. The video decoding system 40 can implement a combination of various technologies in the embodiments of the present application. In the illustrated embodiment, the video decoding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, an encoder 20, a decoder 30 (and/or a video encoder/decoder implemented by a logic circuit 47), an antenna 42, one or more Processors 43, one or more memories 44 and/or display devices 45.

如图1B所示，成像设备41、天线42、逻辑电路47、编码器20、解码器30、处理器43、存储器44和/或显示设备45能够互相通信。如所论述，虽然用编码器20和解码器30绘示视频译码***40，但在不同实例中，视频译码***40可以只包含编码器20或只包含解码器30。As shown in FIG. 1B, the imaging device 41, the antenna 42, the logic circuit 47, the encoder 20, the decoder 30, the processor 43, the memory 44, and/or the display device 45 can communicate with each other. As discussed, although the video coding system 40 is shown with the encoder 20 and the decoder 30, in different examples, the video coding system 40 may include only the encoder 20 or only the decoder 30.

在一些实例中，天线42可以用于传输或接收视频数据的经编码比特流。另外，在一些实例中，显示设备45可以用于呈现视频数据。在一些实例中，逻辑电路47可以包含专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。视频译码***40也可以包含可选的处理器43，该可选处理器43类似地可以包含专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。在一些实例中，逻辑电路47可以通过硬件实施，如视频编码专用硬件等，处理器43 可以通过通用软件、操作***等实施。另外，存储器44可以是任何类型的存储器，例如易失性存储器(例如，静态随机存取存储器(Static Random Access Memory，SRAM)、动态随机存储器(Dynamic Random Access Memory，DRAM)等)或非易失性存储器(例如，闪存等)等。在非限制性实例中，存储器44可以由超速缓存内存实施。在一些实例中，逻辑电路47可以访问存储器44(例如用于实施图像缓冲器)。在其它实例中，逻辑电路47可以包含存储器(例如，缓存等)用于实施图像缓冲器等。In some examples, antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bitstream of video data. Additionally, in some examples, the display device 45 may be used to present video data. In some examples, the logic circuit 47 may include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, or the like. The video decoding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, which may similarly include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like. In some examples, the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by hardware, such as dedicated hardware for video encoding, and the processor 43 may be implemented by general-purpose software, an operating system, and so on. In addition, the memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (for example, static random access memory (Static Random Access Memory, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic Random Access Memory, DRAM), etc.) or non-volatile Memory (for example, flash memory, etc.), etc. In a non-limiting example, the memory 44 may be implemented by cache memory. In some examples, the logic circuit 47 can access the memory 44 (eg, to implement an image buffer). In other examples, the logic circuit 47 may include memory (eg, cache, etc.) for implementing image buffers and the like.

在一些实例中，通过逻辑电路实施的编码器20可以包含(例如，通过存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路47实施的编码器20，以实施参照图2和/或本文中所描述的任何其它编码器***或子***所论述的各种模块。逻辑电路可以用于执行本文所论述的各种操作。In some examples, the encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits may include an image buffer (eg, implemented by the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit. The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include the encoder 20 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein. Logic circuits can be used to perform the various operations discussed herein.

在一些实例中，解码器30可以以类似方式通过逻辑电路47实施，以实施参照图3的解码器30和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器***或子***所论述的各种模块。在一些实例中，逻辑电路实施的解码器30可以包含(通过处理单元2820或存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路47实施的解码器30，以实施参照图3和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器***或子***所论述的各种模块。In some examples, decoder 30 may be implemented by logic circuit 47 in a similar manner to implement the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein. In some examples, the decoder 30 implemented by the logic circuit may include an image buffer (implemented by the processing unit 2820 or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit. The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include a decoder 30 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder system or subsystem described herein.

在一些实例中，天线42可以用于接收视频数据的经编码比特流。如所论述，经编码比特流可以包含本文所论述的与编码视频帧相关的数据、指示符、索引值、模式选择数据等，例如与编码分割相关的数据(例如，变换系数或经量化变换系数，(如所论述的)可选指示符，和/或定义编码分割的数据)。视频译码***40还可包含耦合至天线42并用于解码经编码比特流的解码器30。显示设备45用于呈现视频帧。In some examples, antenna 42 may be used to receive an encoded bitstream of video data. As discussed, the encoded bitstream may include data related to encoded video frames, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc. discussed herein, such as data related to encoded partitions (eg, transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients , (As discussed) optional indicators, and/or data defining the code segmentation). The video coding system 40 may also include a decoder 30 coupled to the antenna 42 and used to decode the encoded bitstream. The display device 45 is used to present video frames.

应理解，本申请实施例中对于参考编码器20所描述的实例，解码器30可以用于执行相反过程。关于信令语法元素，解码器30可以用于接收并解析这种语法元素，相应地解码相关视频数据。在一些例子中，编码器20可以将语法元素熵编码成经编码视频比特流。在此类实例中，解码器30可以解析这种语法元素，并相应地解码相关视频数据。It should be understood that in the example described with reference to the encoder 20 in the embodiment of the present application, the decoder 30 may be used to perform the reverse process. Regarding signaling syntax elements, the decoder 30 may be used to receive and parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly. In some examples, encoder 20 may entropy encode syntax elements into an encoded video bitstream. In such instances, decoder 30 may parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly.

需要说明的是，本申请实施例描述的方法主要用于帧间预测过程，此过程在编码器20和解码器30均存在，本申请实施例中的编码器20和解码器30可以是例如H.263、H.264、HEVV、MPEG-2、MPEG-4、VP8、VP9等视频标准协议或者下一代视频标准协议(如H.266等)对应的编/解码器。It should be noted that the method described in the embodiment of the present application is mainly used in the inter prediction process. This process exists in both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30. The encoder 20 and the decoder 30 in the embodiment of the present application may be, for example, H .263, H.264, HEVV, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, VP8, VP9 and other video standard protocols or next-generation video standard protocols (such as H.266, etc.) corresponding codec/decoder.

参见图2，图2示出用于实现本申请实施例的编码器20的实例的示意性/概念性框图。在图2的实例中，编码器20包括残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器单元220、经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270。预测处理单元260可以包含帧间预测单元244、帧内预测单元254和模式选择单元262。帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计单元和运动补偿单元(未图示)。图2所示的编码器20也可以称为混合型视频编码器或根据混合型视频编解码器的视频编码器。Referring to FIG. 2, FIG. 2 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of an encoder 20 for implementing an embodiment of the present application. In the example of FIG. 2, the encoder 20 includes a residual calculation unit 204, a transform processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, a buffer 216, a loop filter Unit 220, decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, prediction processing unit 260, and entropy encoding unit 270. The prediction processing unit 260 may include an inter prediction unit 244, an intra prediction unit 254, and a mode selection unit 262. The inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown). The encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a video encoder based on a hybrid video codec.

例如，残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270形成编码器20的前向信号路径，而例如逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器220、经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230、预测处理单元260形成编码器的后向信号路径，其中编码器的后向信号路径对应于解码器的信号路径(参见图3中的解码器30)。For example, the residual calculation unit 204, the transform processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208, the prediction processing unit 260, and the entropy encoding unit 270 form the forward signal path of the encoder 20, while, for example, the inverse quantization unit 210, the inverse transform processing unit 212, the heavy The structural unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop filter 220, the decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, and the prediction processing unit 260 form a backward signal path of the encoder, where the backward signal path of the encoder corresponds The signal path for the decoder (see decoder 30 in FIG. 3).

编码器20通过例如输入202，接收图片201或图片201的图像块203，例如，形成视频或视频序列的图片序列中的图片。图像块203也可以称为当前图片块或待编码图片块，图片201可以称为当前图片或待编码图片(尤其是在视频编码中将当前图片与其它图片区分开时，其它图片例如同一视频序列亦即也包括当前图片的视频序列中的先前经编码和/或经解码图片)。The encoder 20 receives a picture 201 or an image block 203 of the picture 201 through, for example, an input 202, for example, a picture in a picture sequence forming a video or a video sequence. The image block 203 may also be called a current picture block or a picture block to be encoded, and the picture 201 may be called a current picture or a picture to be encoded (especially when the current picture is distinguished from other pictures in video encoding, the other pictures are the same video sequence, for example That is, the previously encoded and/or decoded pictures in the video sequence of the current picture are also included).

编码器20的实施例可以包括分割单元(图2中未绘示)，用于将图片201分割成多个例如图像块203的块，通常分割成多个不重叠的块。分割单元可以用于对视频序列中所有图片使用相同的块大小以及定义块大小的对应栅格，或用于在图片或子集或图片群组之间更改块大小，并将每个图片分割成对应的块。An embodiment of the encoder 20 may include a division unit (not shown in FIG. 2) for dividing the picture 201 into a plurality of blocks such as image blocks 203, usually into a plurality of non-overlapping blocks. The segmentation unit can be used to use the same block size and corresponding grids that define the block size for all pictures in the video sequence, or to change the block size between pictures or subsets or picture groups, and divide each picture into The corresponding block.

在一个实例中，编码器20的预测处理单元260可以用于执行上述分割技术的任何组合。In one example, the prediction processing unit 260 of the encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the above-mentioned segmentation techniques.

如图片201，图像块203也是或可以视为具有采样值的采样点的二维阵列或矩阵，虽然其尺寸比图片201小。换句话说，图像块203可以包括，例如，一个采样阵列(例如黑白图片201情况下的亮度阵列)或三个采样阵列(例如，彩色图片情况下的一个亮度阵列和两个色度阵列)或依据所应用的色彩格式的任何其它数目和/或类别的阵列。图像块203的水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上采样点的数目定义图像块203的尺寸。Like picture 201, image block 203 is also or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with sample values, although its size is smaller than picture 201. In other words, the image block 203 may include, for example, one sampling array (for example, the brightness array in the case of black and white picture 201) or three sampling arrays (for example, one brightness array and two chroma arrays in the case of color picture) or An array of any other number and/or category depending on the color format applied. The number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the image block 203 defines the size of the image block 203.

如图2所示的编码器20用于逐块编码图片201，例如，对每个图像块203执行编码和预测。The encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode the picture 201 block by block, for example, to perform encoding and prediction on each image block 203.

残差计算单元204用于基于图片图像块203和预测块265(下文提供预测块265的其它细节)计算残差块205，例如，通过逐样本(逐像素)将图片图像块203的样本值减去预测块265的样本值，以在样本域中获取残差块205。The residual calculation unit 204 is used to calculate the residual block 205 based on the picture image block 203 and the prediction block 265 (other details of the prediction block 265 are provided below), for example, by subtracting the sample value of the picture image block 203 sample by sample (pixel by pixel) The sample values of the block 265 are depredicted to obtain the residual block 205 in the sample domain.

变换处理单元206用于在残差块205的样本值上应用例如离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform，DCT)或离散正弦变换(discrete sine transform，DST)的变换，以在变换域中获取变换系数207。变换系数207也可以称为变换残差系数，并在变换域中表示残差块205。The transform processing unit 206 is used to apply a transform such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) on the sample values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain . The transform coefficient 207 may also be called a transform residual coefficient, and represents a residual block 205 in the transform domain.

变换处理单元206可以用于应用DCT/DST的整数近似值，例如为HEVC/H.265指定的变换。与正交DCT变换相比，这种整数近似值通常由某一因子按比例缩放。为了维持经正变换和逆变换处理的残差块的范数，应用额外比例缩放因子作为变换过程的一部分。比例缩放因子通常是基于某些约束条件选择的，例如，比例缩放因子是用于移位运算的2的幂、变换系数的位深度、准确性和实施成本之间的权衡等。例如，在解码器30侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为逆变换(以及在编码器20侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为对应逆变换)指定具体比例缩放因子，以及相应地，可以在编码器20侧通过变换处理单元206为正变换指定对应比例缩放因子。The transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply integer approximations of DCT/DST, such as the transform specified by HEVC/H.265. Compared with the orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by a factor. In order to maintain the norm of the residual block processed by the forward and inverse transform, an additional scaling factor is applied as part of the transform process. The scaling factor is usually selected based on certain constraints. For example, the scaling factor is a power of two used for the shift operation, the bit depth of the transform coefficient, the accuracy, and the trade-off between implementation cost, and so on. For example, a specific scaling factor can be specified for the inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the decoder 30 side (and corresponding inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the encoder 20 side), and accordingly, the encoder can be The 20 side specifies a corresponding scaling factor for the positive transform through the transform processing unit 206.

量化单元208用于例如通过应用标量量化或向量量化来量化变换系数207，以获取经量化变换系数209。经量化变换系数209也可以称为经量化残差系数209。量化过程可以减少与部分或全部变换系数207有关的位深度。例如，可在量化期间将n位变换系数向下舍入到m位变换系数，其中n大于m。可通过调整量化参数(quantization parameter，QP)修改量化程度。例如，对于标量量化，可以应用不同的标度来实现较细或较粗的量化。较小量化步长对应较细量化，而较大量化步长对应较粗量化。可以通过量化参数(quantization parameter，QP)指示合适的量化步长。例如，量化参数可以为合适的量化步长的预定义集合的索引。例如，较小的量化参数可以对应精细量化(较小量化步长)，较大量化参数可以对应粗糙量化(较大量化步长)，反之亦然。量化可以包含除以量化步长以及例如通过逆量化210执行的对应的量化或逆量化，或者可以包含乘以量化步长。根据例如HEVC的一些标准的实施例可以使用量化参数来确定量化步长。一般而言，可以基于量化参数使用包含除法的等式的定点近似来计算量化步长。可以引入额外比例缩放因子来进行量化和反量化，以恢复可能由于在用于量化步长和量化参数的等式的定点近似中使用的标度而修改的残差块的范数。在一个实例实施方式中，可以合并逆变换和反量化的标度。或者，可以使用自定义量化表并在例如比特流中将其从编码器通过信号发送到解码器。量化是有损操作，其中量化步长越大，损耗越大。The quantization unit 208 is used to quantize the transform coefficient 207 by, for example, applying scalar quantization or vector quantization to obtain the quantized transform coefficient 209. The quantized transform coefficient 209 may also be referred to as a quantized residual coefficient 209. The quantization process can reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207. For example, n-bit transform coefficients can be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m. The degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting quantization parameters (QP). For example, for scalar quantization, different scales can be applied to achieve thinner or coarser quantization. A smaller quantization step size corresponds to a finer quantization, and a larger quantization step size corresponds to a coarser quantization. A suitable quantization step size can be indicated by a quantization parameter (QP). For example, the quantization parameter may be an index of a predefined set of suitable quantization steps. For example, smaller quantization parameters may correspond to fine quantization (smaller quantization step size), larger quantization parameters may correspond to coarse quantization (larger quantization step size), and vice versa. The quantization may include dividing by the quantization step size and the corresponding quantization or inverse quantization performed by, for example, inverse quantization 210, or may include multiplying the quantization step size. Embodiments according to some standards such as HEVC may use quantization parameters to determine the quantization step size. Generally speaking, the quantization step size can be calculated based on the quantization parameter using a fixed-point approximation including an equation of division. Additional scaling factors can be introduced for quantization and inverse quantization to restore the norm of the residual block that may be modified due to the scale used in fixed-point approximation of the equations for quantization step size and quantization parameter. In an example embodiment, the scale of inverse transform and inverse quantization may be combined. Alternatively, a custom quantization table can be used and signaled from the encoder to the decoder in the bitstream, for example. Quantization is a lossy operation, where the larger the quantization step, the greater the loss.

逆量化单元210用于在经量化系数上应用量化单元208的逆量化，以获取经反量化系数211，例如，基于或使用与量化单元208相同的量化步长，应用量化单元208应用的量化方案的逆量化方案。经反量化系数211也可以称为经反量化残差系数211，对应于变换系数207，虽然由于量化造成的损耗通常与变换系数不相同。The inverse quantization unit 210 is used to apply the inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the inverse quantization coefficients 211, for example, based on or using the same quantization step size as the quantization unit 208, apply the quantization scheme applied by the quantization unit 208 Inverse quantization scheme. The inverse quantized coefficient 211 may also be referred to as an inverse quantized residual coefficient 211, which corresponds to the transform coefficient 207, although the loss due to quantization is usually not the same as the transform coefficient.

逆变换处理单元212用于应用变换处理单元206应用的变换的逆变换，例如，逆离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform，DCT)或逆离散正弦变换(discrete sine transform，DST)，以在样本域中获取逆变换块213。逆变换块213也可以称为逆变换经反量化块213或逆变换残差块213。The inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to apply the inverse transform of the transform applied by the transform processing unit 206, for example, an inverse discrete cosine transform (DCT) or an inverse discrete sine transform (DST), in the sample domain The inverse transform block 213 is obtained. The inverse transform block 213 may also be referred to as an inverse transform dequantized block 213 or an inverse transform residual block 213.

重构单元214(例如，求和器214)用于将逆变换块213(即经重构残差块213)添加至预测块265，以在样本域中获取经重构块215，例如，将经重构残差块213的样本值与预测块265的样本值相加。The reconstruction unit 214 (eg, summer 214) is used to add the inverse transform block 213 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 213) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the sample domain, for example, The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 213 and the sample values of the prediction block 265 are added.

可选地，例如线缓冲器216的缓冲器单元216(或简称“缓冲器”216)用于缓冲或存储经重构块215和对应的样本值，用于例如帧内预测。在其它的实施例中，编码器可以用于使用存储在缓冲器单元216中的未经滤波的经重构块和/或对应的样本值来进行任何类别的估计和/或预测，例如帧内预测。Optionally, a buffer unit 216 (or simply "buffer" 216), such as a line buffer 216, is used to buffer or store the reconstructed block 215 and corresponding sample values for, for example, intra prediction. In other embodiments, the encoder may be used to use the unfiltered reconstructed blocks and/or corresponding sample values stored in the buffer unit 216 for any type of estimation and/or prediction, such as intra prediction.

例如，编码器20的实施例可以经配置以使得缓冲器单元216不只用于存储用于帧内预测254的经重构块215，也用于环路滤波器单元220(在图2中未示出)，和/或，例如使得缓冲器单元216和经解码图片缓冲器单元230形成一个缓冲器。其它实施例可以用于将经滤波块221和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的块或样本(图2中均未示出)用作帧内预测254的输入或基础。For example, an embodiment of the encoder 20 may be configured such that the buffer unit 216 is used not only to store the reconstructed block 215 for intra prediction 254, but also for the loop filter unit 220 (not shown in FIG. 2) Out), and/or, for example, causing the buffer unit 216 and the decoded picture buffer unit 230 to form a buffer. Other embodiments may be used to use the filtered block 221 and/or blocks or samples from the decoded picture buffer 230 (neither shown in FIG. 2) as an input or basis for intra prediction 254.

环路滤波器单元220(或简称“环路滤波器”220)用于对经重构块215进行滤波以获取经滤波块221，从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。环路滤波器单元220旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器，例如去块滤波器、样本自适应偏移(sample-adaptive offset，SAO)滤波器或其它滤波器，例如双边滤波器、自适应环路滤波器(adaptive loop filter，ALF)，或锐化或平滑滤波器，或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元220在图2中示出为环内滤波器，但在其它配置中，环路滤波器单元220可实施为环后滤波器。经滤波块221也可以称为经滤波的经重构块221。经解码图片缓冲器230可以在环路滤波器单元220对经重构编码块执行滤波操作之后存储经重构编码块。The loop filter unit 220 (or simply "loop filter" 220) is used to filter the reconstructed block 215 to obtain the filtered block 221, so as to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality. The loop filter unit 220 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filters, or other filters, such as bilateral filters, Adaptive loop filter (adaptive loop filter, ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filter, or collaborative filter. Although the loop filter unit 220 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 2, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter. The filtered block 221 may also be referred to as the filtered reconstructed block 221. The decoded picture buffer 230 may store the reconstructed encoding block after the loop filter unit 220 performs a filtering operation on the reconstructed encoding block.

编码器20(对应地，环路滤波器单元220)的实施例可以用于输出环路滤波器参数(例如，样本自适应偏移信息)，例如，直接输出或由熵编码单元270或任何其它熵编码单元熵编码后输出，例如使得解码器30可以接收并应用相同的环路滤波器参数用于解码。Embodiments of the encoder 20 (correspondingly, the loop filter unit 220) may be used to output loop filter parameters (eg, sample adaptive offset information), for example, directly output or by the entropy encoding unit 270 or any other The entropy encoding unit outputs after entropy encoding, for example, so that the decoder 30 can receive and apply the same loop filter parameters for decoding.

经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230可以为存储参考图片数据供编码器20编码视频数据之用的参考图片存储器。DPB 230可由多种存储器设备中的任一个形成，例如动态随机存储器(dynamic random access memory，DRAM)(包含同步DRAM(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、磁阻式RAM(magnetoresistive RAM，MRAM)、电阻式RAM(resistive RAM，RRAM))或其它类型的存储器设备。可以由同一存储器设备或单独的存储器设备提供DPB 230和缓冲器216。在某一实例中，经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230用于存储经滤波块221。经解码图片缓冲器230可以进一步用于存储同一当前图片或例如先前经重构图片的不同图片的其它先前的经滤波块，例如先前经重构和经滤波块221，以及可以提供完整的先前经重构亦即经解码图片(和对应参考块和样本)和/或部分经重构当前图片(和对应参考块和样本)，例如用于帧间预测。在某一实例中，如果经重构块215无需环内滤波而得以重构，则经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230用于存储经重构块215。The decoded picture buffer (decoded picture buffer, DPB) 230 may be a reference picture memory for storing reference picture data for the encoder 20 to encode video data. DPB 230 can be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as dynamic random access memory (dynamic random access memory, DRAM) (including synchronous DRAM (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (magnetoresistive RAM, MRAM), resistive RAM (resistive RAM, RRAM)) or other types of memory devices. The DPB 230 and the buffer 216 may be provided by the same memory device or separate memory devices. In a certain example, a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the filtered block 221. The decoded picture buffer 230 may be further used to store other previous filtered blocks of the same current picture or different pictures such as previous reconstructed pictures, such as the previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and may provide the complete previous The reconstructed ie decoded pictures (and corresponding reference blocks and samples) and/or partially reconstructed current pictures (and corresponding reference blocks and samples), for example for inter prediction. In a certain example, if the reconstructed block 215 is reconstructed without in-loop filtering, a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the reconstructed block 215.

预测处理单元260，也称为块预测处理单元260，用于接收或获取图像块203(当前图片201的当前图像块203)和经重构图片数据，例如来自缓冲器216的同一(当前)图片的参考样本和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的一个或多个先前经解码图片的参考图片数据231，以及用于处理这类数据进行预测，即提供可以为经帧间预测块245或经帧内预测块255的预测块265。The prediction processing unit 260, also known as the block prediction processing unit 260, is used to receive or acquire the image block 203 (current image block 203 of the current picture 201) and reconstructed picture data, such as the same (current) picture from the buffer 216 Reference samples and/or reference picture data 231 of one or more previously decoded pictures from the decoded picture buffer 230, and used to process such data for prediction, that is, to provide an inter prediction block 245 or The prediction block 265 of the intra prediction block 255.

模式选择单元262可以用于选择预测模式(例如帧内或帧间预测模式)和/或对应的用作预测块265的预测块245或255，以计算残差块205和重构经重构块215。The mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction mode) and/or the corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.

模式选择单元262的实施例可以用于选择预测模式(例如，从预测处理单元260所支持的那些预测模式中选择)，所述预测模式提供最佳匹配或者说最小残差(最小残差意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩)，或提供最小信令开销(最小信令开销意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩)，或同时考虑或平衡以上两者。模式选择单元262可以用于基于码率失真优化(rate distortion optimization，RDO)确定预测模式，即选择提供最小码率失真优化的预测模式，或选择相关码率失真至少满足预测模式选择标准的预测模式。An embodiment of the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (for example, from those prediction modes supported by the prediction processing unit 260), which provides the best match or the minimum residual (the minimum residual means Better compression in transmission or storage), or provide minimum signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead means better compression in transmission or storage), or consider or balance both at the same time. The mode selection unit 262 may be used to determine a prediction mode based on rate distortion optimization (RDO), that is, to select a prediction mode that provides minimum bit rate distortion optimization, or to select a prediction mode in which the related bit rate distortion at least meets the prediction mode selection criteria .

下文将详细解释编码器20的实例(例如，通过预测处理单元260)执行的预测处理和(例如，通过模式选择单元262)执行的模式选择。The prediction process performed by the example of the encoder 20 (for example, by the prediction processing unit 260) and the mode selection (for example, by the mode selection unit 262) will be explained in detail below.

如上文所述，编码器20用于从(预先确定的)预测模式集合中确定或选择最好或最优的预测模式。预测模式集合可以包括例如帧内预测模式和/或帧间预测模式。As described above, the encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from the (predetermined) prediction mode set. The set of prediction modes may include, for example, intra prediction modes and/or inter prediction modes.

帧内预测模式集合可以包括35种不同的帧内预测模式，例如，如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式，或如H.265中定义的方向性模式，或者可以包括67种不同的帧内预测模式，例如，如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式，或如正在发展中的H.266中定义的方向性模式。The intra prediction mode set may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in H.265, or may include 67 Different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in the developing H.266.

在可能的实现中，帧间预测模式集合取决于可用参考图片(即，例如前述存储在DBP230中的至少部分经解码图片)和其它帧间预测参数，例如取决于是否使用整个参考图片或只使用参考图片的一部分，例如围绕当前块的区域的搜索窗区域，来搜索最佳匹配参考块，和/或例如取决于是否应用如半像素和/或四分之一像素内插的像素内插，帧间预测模式集合例如可包括先进运动矢量(Advanced Motion Vector Prediction，AMVP)模式和融合(merge)模式。具体实施中，帧间预测模式集合可包括本申请实施例改进的基于控制点的AMVP模式，以及，改进的基于控制点的merge模式。在一个实例中，帧内预测单元254可以用于执行下文描述的帧间预测技术的任意组合。In a possible implementation, the set of inter-prediction modes depends on the available reference pictures (ie, for example, the aforementioned at least partially decoded pictures stored in DBP 230) and other inter-prediction parameters, such as whether the entire reference picture is used or only used A part of the reference picture, for example a search window area surrounding the area of the current block, to search for the best matching reference block, and/or for example depending on whether pixel interpolation such as half-pixel and/or quarter-pixel interpolation is applied, The set of inter prediction modes may include, for example, advanced motion vector (Advanced Motion Vector Prediction, AMVP) mode and merge mode. In a specific implementation, the set of inter prediction modes may include an improved control point-based AMVP mode according to an embodiment of the present application, and an improved control point-based merge mode. In one example, the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques described below.

除了以上预测模式，本申请实施例也可以应用跳过模式和/或直接模式。In addition to the above prediction modes, the embodiments of the present application may also apply skip mode and/or direct mode.

预测处理单元260可以进一步用于将图像块203分割成较小的块分区或子块，例如，通过迭代使用四叉树(quad-tree，QT)分割、二进制树(binary-tree，BT)分割或三叉树(triple-tree，TT)分割，或其任何组合，以及用于例如为块分区或子块中的每一个执行预测，其中模式选择包括选择分割的图像块203的树结构和选择应用于块分区或子块中的每一个的预测模式。The prediction processing unit 260 may be further used to split the image block 203 into smaller block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, iteratively using quad-tree (QT) segmentation, binary-tree (BT) segmentation Or triple-tree (TT) partitioning, or any combination thereof, and for performing prediction for each of block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, where mode selection includes selecting the tree structure of the divided image block 203 and selecting the application The prediction mode for each of the block partitions or sub-blocks.

帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计(motion estimation，ME)单元(图2中未示出)和运动补偿(motion compensation，MC)单元(图2中未示出)。运动估计单元用于接收或获取图片图像块203(当前图片201的当前图片图像块203)和经解码图片231，或至少一个或多个先前经重构块，例如，一个或多个其它/不同先前经解码图片231的经重构块，来进行运动估计。例如，视频序列可以包括当前图片和先前经解码图片31，或换句话说，当前图片和先前经解码图片31可以是形成视频序列的图片序列的一部分，或者形成该图片序列。The inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME) unit (not shown in FIG. 2) and a motion compensation (MC) unit (not shown in FIG. 2). The motion estimation unit is used to receive or acquire a picture image block 203 (current picture image block 203 of the current picture 201) and a decoded picture 231, or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, for example, one or more other/different The reconstructed block of the previously decoded picture 231 is used for motion estimation. For example, the video sequence may include the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31, or in other words, the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31 may be part of the picture sequence forming the video sequence, or form the picture sequence.

例如，编码器20可以用于从多个其它图片中的同一或不同图片的多个参考块中选择参考块，并向运动估计单元(图2中未示出)提供参考图片和/或提供参考块的位置(X、Y坐标)与当前块的位置之间的偏移(空间偏移)作为帧间预测参数。该偏移也称为运动向量(motion vector，MV)。For example, the encoder 20 may be used to select a reference block from multiple reference blocks of the same or different pictures in multiple other pictures, and provide a reference picture and/or provide a reference to a motion estimation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) The offset (spatial offset) between the position of the block (X, Y coordinates) and the position of the current block is used as an inter prediction parameter. This offset is also called a motion vector (MV).

运动补偿单元用于获取帧间预测参数，并基于或使用帧间预测参数执行帧间预测来获取帧间预测块245。由运动补偿单元(图2中未示出)执行的运动补偿可以包含基于通过运动估计(可能执行对子像素精确度的内插)确定的运动/块向量取出或生成预测块。内插滤波可从已知像素样本产生额外像素样本，从而潜在地增加可用于编码图片块的候选预测块的数目。一旦接收到用于当前图片块的PU的运动向量，运动补偿单元246可以在一个参考图片列表中定位运动向量指向的预测块。运动补偿单元246还可以生成与块和视频条带相关联的语法元素，以供解码器30在解码视频条带的图片块时使用。The motion compensation unit is used to acquire inter prediction parameters, and perform inter prediction based on or using inter prediction parameters to obtain inter prediction blocks 245. The motion compensation performed by the motion compensation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) may include extracting or generating a prediction block based on a motion/block vector determined by motion estimation (possibly performing interpolation of sub-pixel accuracy). Interpolation filtering can generate additional pixel samples from known pixel samples, potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode picture blocks. Once the motion vector for the PU of the current picture block is received, the motion compensation unit 246 may locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in a reference picture list. Motion compensation unit 246 may also generate syntax elements associated with blocks and video slices for use by decoder 30 when decoding picture blocks of video slices.

具体的，上述帧间预测单元244可向熵编码单元270传输语法元素，所述语法元素包括帧间预测参数(比如遍历多个帧间预测模式后选择用于当前块预测的帧间预测模式的指示信息)。可能应用场景中，如果帧间预测模式只有一种，那么也可以不在语法元素中携带帧间预测参数，此时解码端30可直接使用默认的预测模式进行解码。可以理解的，帧间预测单元244可以用于执行帧间预测技术的任意组合。Specifically, the above inter prediction unit 244 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes inter prediction parameters (such as an inter prediction mode selected for the current block prediction after traversing multiple inter prediction modes Instructions). In a possible application scenario, if there is only one inter prediction mode, the inter prediction parameters may not be carried in the syntax element. In this case, the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding. It can be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques.

帧内预测单元254用于获取，例如接收同一图片的图片块203(当前图片块)和一个或多个先前经重构块，例如经重构相相邻块，以进行帧内估计。例如，编码器20可以用于从多个(预定)帧内预测模式中选择帧内预测模式。The intra prediction unit 254 is used to acquire, for example, a picture block 203 (current picture block) that receives the same picture and one or more previously reconstructed blocks, such as reconstructed neighboring blocks, for intra estimation. For example, the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode from a plurality of (predetermined) intra prediction modes.

编码器20的实施例可以用于基于优化标准选择帧内预测模式，例如基于最小残差(例如，提供最类似于当前图片块203的预测块255的帧内预测模式)或最小码率失真。Embodiments of the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode based on optimization criteria, for example, based on a minimum residual (eg, an intra prediction mode that provides the prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203) or minimum rate distortion.

帧内预测单元254进一步用于基于如所选择的帧内预测模式的帧内预测参数确定帧内预测块255。在任何情况下，在选择用于块的帧内预测模式之后，帧内预测单元254还用于向熵编码单元270提供帧内预测参数，即提供指示所选择的用于块的帧内预测模式的信息。在一个实例中，帧内预测单元254可以用于执行帧内预测技术的任意组合。The intra prediction unit 254 is further used to determine the intra prediction block 255 based on the intra prediction parameters of the intra prediction mode as selected. In any case, after selecting the intra-prediction mode for the block, the intra-prediction unit 254 is also used to provide the intra-prediction parameters to the entropy encoding unit 270, that is, to provide an indication of the selected intra-prediction mode for the block Information. In one example, the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of intra prediction techniques.

具体的，上述帧内预测单元254可向熵编码单元270传输语法元素，所述语法元素包括帧内预测参数(比如遍历多个帧内预测模式后选择用于当前块预测的帧内预测模式的指示信息)。可能应用场景中，如果帧内预测模式只有一种，那么也可以不在语法元素中携带帧内预测参数，此时解码端30可直接使用默认的预测模式进行解码。Specifically, the above-mentioned intra-prediction unit 254 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes intra-prediction parameters (such as an intra-prediction mode selected for the current block prediction after traversing multiple intra-prediction modes) Instructions). In a possible application scenario, if there is only one intra prediction mode, the intra prediction parameters may not be carried in the syntax element. In this case, the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding.

熵编码单元270用于将熵编码算法或方案(例如，可变长度编码(variable length coding，VLC)方案、上下文自适应VLC(context adaptive VLC，CAVLC)方案、算术编码方案、上下文自适应二进制算术编码(context adaptive binary arithmetic coding，CABAC)、基于语法的上下文自适应二进制算术编码(syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding，SBAC)、概率区间分割熵(probability interval partitioning entropy，PIPE)编码或其它熵编码方法或技术)应用于经量化残差系数209、帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或环路滤波器参数中的单个或所有上(或不应用)，以获取可以通过输出272以例如经编码比特流21的形式输出的经编码图片数据21。可以将经编码比特流传输到视频解码器30，或将其存档稍后由视频解码器30传输或检索。熵编码单元270还可用于熵编码正被编码的当前视频条带的其它语法元素。The entropy coding unit 270 is used to convert the entropy coding algorithm or scheme (for example, variable length coding (VLC) scheme, context adaptive VLC (context adaptive VLC, CAVLC) scheme, arithmetic coding scheme, context adaptive binary arithmetic) Coding (context adaptive) binary arithmetic coding (CABAC), syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding (SBAC), probability interval partition entropy (probability interval interpartitioning entropy, PIPE) coding or other entropy Coding method or technique) applied to a single or all of the quantized residual coefficients 209, inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or loop filter parameters (or not applied) to obtain the output 272 to For example, the encoded picture data 21 output in the form of an encoded bit stream 21. The encoded bitstream may be transmitted to the video decoder 30 or archived for later transmission or retrieval by the video decoder 30. The entropy encoding unit 270 may also be used to entropy encode other syntax elements of the current video slice being encoded.

视频编码器20的其它结构变型可用于编码视频流。例如，基于非变换的编码器20可以在没有针对某些块或帧的变换处理单元206的情况下直接量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中，编码器20可具有组合成单个单元的量化单元208和逆量化单元210。Other structural variations of video encoder 20 may be used to encode video streams. For example, the non-transform based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without the transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames. In another embodiment, the encoder 20 may have a quantization unit 208 and an inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.

应当理解的是，视频编码器20的其它的结构变化可用于编码视频流。例如，对于某些图像块或者图像帧，视频编码器20可以直接地量化残差信号而不需要经变换处理单元206处理，相应地也不需要经逆变换处理单元212处理；或者，对于某些图像块或者图像帧，视频编码器20没有产生残差数据，相应地不需要经变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210和逆变换处理单元212处理；或者，视频编码器20可以将经重构图像块作为参考块直接地进行存储而不需要经滤波器220处理；或者，视频编码器20中量化单元208和逆量化单元210可以合并在一起。环路滤波器220是可选的，以及针对无损压缩编码的情况下，变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210和逆变换处理单元212是可选的。应当理解的是，根据不同的应用场景，帧间预测单元244和帧内预测单元254可以是被选择性的启用。It should be understood that other structural changes of the video encoder 20 may be used to encode the video stream. For example, for some image blocks or image frames, the video encoder 20 can directly quantize the residual signal without processing by the transform processing unit 206, and accordingly, without processing by the inverse transform processing unit 212; or, for some For image blocks or image frames, the video encoder 20 does not generate residual data, and accordingly does not need to be processed by the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212; or, the video encoder 20 may convert The reconstructed image block is directly stored as a reference block without being processed by the filter 220; alternatively, the quantization unit 208 and the inverse quantization unit 210 in the video encoder 20 may be merged together. The loop filter 220 is optional, and in the case of lossless compression coding, the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212 are optional. It should be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 and the intra prediction unit 254 may be selectively enabled according to different application scenarios.

参见图3，图3示出用于实现本申请实施例的解码器30的实例的示意性/概念性框图。视频解码器30用于接收例如由编码器20编码的经编码图片数据(例如，经编码比特流)21，以获取经解码图片231。在解码过程期间，视频解码器30从视频编码器20接收视频数据，例如表示经编码视频条带的图片块的经编码视频比特流及相关联的语法元素。Referring to FIG. 3, FIG. 3 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of a decoder 30 for implementing an embodiment of the present application. The video decoder 30 is used to receive encoded picture data (eg, encoded bitstream) 21, for example, encoded by the encoder 20, to obtain the decoded picture 231. During the decoding process, video decoder 30 receives video data from video encoder 20, such as an encoded video bitstream and associated syntax elements representing picture blocks of the encoded video slice.

在图3的实例中，解码器30包括熵解码单元304、逆量化单元310、逆变换处理单元312、重构单元314(例如求和器314)、缓冲器316、环路滤波器320、经解码图片缓冲器330以及预测处理单元360。预测处理单元360可以包含帧间预测单元344、帧内预测单元354和模式选择单元362。在一些实例中，视频解码器30可执行大体上与参照图2的视频编码器20描述的编码遍次互逆的解码遍次。In the example of FIG. 3, the decoder 30 includes an entropy decoding unit 304, an inverse quantization unit 310, an inverse transform processing unit 312, a reconstruction unit 314 (such as a summer 314), a buffer 316, a loop filter 320, a The decoded picture buffer 330 and the prediction processing unit 360. The prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344, an intra prediction unit 354, and a mode selection unit 362. In some examples, video decoder 30 may perform a decoding pass that is generally inverse to the encoding pass described with reference to video encoder 20 of FIG. 2.

熵解码单元304用于对经编码图片数据21执行熵解码，以获取例如经量化系数309和/或经解码的编码参数(图3中未示出)，例如，帧间预测、帧内预测参数、环路滤波器参数和/或其它语法元素中(经解码)的任意一个或全部。熵解码单元304进一步用于将帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或其它语法元素转发至预测处理单元360。视频解码器30可接收视频条带层级和/或视频块层级的语法元素。The entropy decoding unit 304 is used to perform entropy decoding on the encoded picture data 21 to obtain, for example, quantized coefficients 309 and/or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3), for example, inter prediction, intra prediction parameters , Any or all of the loop filter parameters and/or other syntax elements (decoded). The entropy decoding unit 304 is further used to forward inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or other syntax elements to the prediction processing unit 360. Video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice level and/or the video block level.

逆量化单元310功能上可与逆量化单元110相同，逆变换处理单元312功能上可与逆变换处理单元212相同，重构单元314功能上可与重构单元214相同，缓冲器316功能上可与缓冲器216相同，环路滤波器320功能上可与环路滤波器220相同，经解码图片缓冲器330功能上可与经解码图片缓冲器230相同。The inverse quantization unit 310 may be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110, the inverse transform processing unit 312 may be functionally the same as the inverse transform processing unit 212, the reconstruction unit 314 may be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214, and the buffer 316 may be functionally Like the buffer 216, the loop filter 320 may be functionally the same as the loop filter 220, and the decoded picture buffer 330 may be functionally the same as the decoded picture buffer 230.

预测处理单元360可以包括帧间预测单元344和帧内预测单元354，其中帧间预测单元344功能上可以类似于帧间预测单元244，帧内预测单元354功能上可以类似于帧内预测单元254。预测处理单元360通常用于执行块预测和/或从经编码数据21获取预测块365，以及从例如熵解码单元304(显式地或隐式地)接收或获取预测相关参数和/或关于所选择的预测模式的信息。The prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354, wherein the inter prediction unit 344 may be similar in function to the inter prediction unit 244, and the intra prediction unit 354 may be similar in function to the intra prediction unit 254 . The prediction processing unit 360 is generally used to perform block prediction and/or obtain the prediction block 365 from the encoded data 21, and receive or obtain prediction-related parameters and/or information about the entropy decoding unit 304 (explicitly or implicitly). Information about the selected prediction mode.

当视频条带经编码为经帧内编码(I)条带时，预测处理单元360的帧内预测单元354用于基于信号表示的帧内预测模式及来自当前帧或图片的先前经解码块的数据来产生用于当前视频条带的图片块的预测块365。当视频帧经编码为经帧间编码(即B或P)条带时，预测处理单元360的帧间预测单元344(例如，运动补偿单元)用于基于运动向量及从熵解码单元304接收的其它语法元素生成用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测块365。对于帧间预测，可从一个参考图片列表内的一个参考图片中产生预测块。视频解码器30可基于存储于DPB 330中的参考图片，使用默认建构技术来建构参考帧列表：列表0和列表1。When the video slice is encoded as an intra-coded (I) slice, the intra prediction unit 354 of the prediction processing unit 360 is used to signal-based the intra prediction mode and the previous decoded block from the current frame or picture. Data to generate a prediction block 365 for the picture block of the current video slice. When the video frame is encoded as an inter-coded (ie, B or P) slice, the inter prediction unit 344 (eg, motion compensation unit) of the prediction processing unit 360 is used for the motion vector-based and received from the entropy decoding unit 304 Other syntax elements generate a prediction block 365 for the video block of the current video slice. For inter prediction, a prediction block may be generated from a reference picture in a reference picture list. The video decoder 30 may construct the reference frame lists: list 0 and list 1 based on the reference pictures stored in the DPB 330 using default construction techniques.

预测处理单元360用于通过解析运动向量和其它语法元素，确定用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测信息，并使用预测信息产生用于正经解码的当前视频块的预测块。在本申请的一实例中，预测处理单元360使用接收到的一些语法元素确定用于编码视频条带的视频块的预测模式(例如，帧内或帧间预测)、帧间预测条带类型(例如，B条带、P条带或GPB条带)、用于条带的参考图片列表中的一个或多个的建构信息、用于条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的运动向量、条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的帧间预测状态以及其它信息，以解码当前视频条带的视频块。在本公开的另一实例中，视频解码器30从比特流接收的语法元素包含接收自适应参数集(adaptive parameter set，APS)、序列参数集(sequence parameter set，SPS)、图片参数集(picture parameter set，PPS)或条带标头中的一个或多个中的语法元素。The prediction processing unit 360 is used to determine the prediction information for the video block of the current video slice by parsing the motion vector and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate the prediction block for the current video block being decoded. In an example of the present application, the prediction processing unit 360 uses some received syntax elements to determine the prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction) of the video block used to encode the video slice, and the inter prediction slice type ( For example, B slice, P slice, or GPB slice), construction information of one or more of the reference picture lists for slices, motion vectors for each inter-coded video block for slices, The inter prediction status and other information of each inter-coded video block of the slice to decode the video block of the current video slice. In another example of the present disclosure, the syntax elements received by the video decoder 30 from the bitstream include an adaptive parameter set (adaptive parameter set, APS), sequence parameter set (SPS), and picture parameter set (picture parameter (set, PPS) or the syntax element in one or more of the stripe headers.

逆量化单元310可用于逆量化(即，反量化)在比特流中提供且由熵解码单元304解码的经量化变换系数。逆量化过程可包含使用由视频编码器20针对视频条带中的每一视频块所计算的量化参数来确定应该应用的量化程度并同样确定应该应用的逆量化程度。The inverse quantization unit 310 may be used to inverse quantize (ie, inverse quantize) the quantized transform coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304. The inverse quantization process may include using the quantization parameters calculated by the video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization that should be applied and also determine the degree of inverse quantization that should be applied.

逆变换处理单元312用于将逆变换(例如，逆DCT、逆整数变换或概念上类似的逆变换过程)应用于变换系数，以便在像素域中产生残差块。The inverse transform processing unit 312 is used to apply an inverse transform (eg, inverse DCT, inverse integer transform, or conceptually similar inverse transform process) to the transform coefficients, so as to generate a residual block in the pixel domain.

重构单元314(例如，求和器314)用于将逆变换块313(即经重构残差块313)添加到预测块365，以在样本域中获取经重构块315，例如通过将经重构残差块313的样本值与预测块365的样本值相加。The reconstruction unit 314 (eg, summer 314) is used to add the inverse transform block 313 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 313) to the prediction block 365 to obtain the reconstructed block 315 in the sample domain, for example by The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 313 are added to the sample values of the prediction block 365.

环路滤波器单元320(在编码循环期间或在编码循环之后)用于对经重构块315进行滤波以获取经滤波块321，从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。在一个实例中，环路滤波器单元320可以用于执行下文描述的滤波技术的任意组合。环路滤波器单元320旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器，例如去块滤波器、样本自适应偏移(sample-adaptive offset，SAO)滤波器或其它滤波器，例如双边滤波器、自适应环路滤波器(adaptive loop filter，ALF)，或锐化或平滑滤波器，或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元320在图3中示出为环内滤波器，但在其它配置中，环路滤波器单元320可实施为环后滤波器。The loop filter unit 320 (during the encoding loop or after the encoding loop) is used to filter the reconstructed block 315 to obtain the filtered block 321 to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality. In one example, the loop filter unit 320 may be used to perform any combination of filtering techniques described below. The loop filter unit 320 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filters, or other filters, such as bilateral filters, self-adaptive filters Adaptive loop filter (adaptive loop filter, ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filter, or collaborative filter. Although the loop filter unit 320 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 3, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.

随后将给定帧或图片中的经解码视频块321存储在存储用于后续运动补偿的参考图片的经解码图片缓冲器330中。The decoded video block 321 in a given frame or picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 that stores reference pictures for subsequent motion compensation.

解码器30用于例如，藉由输出332输出经解码图片31，以向用户呈现或供用户查看。The decoder 30 is used, for example, to output the decoded picture 31 through the output 332 for presentation to the user or for the user to view.

视频解码器30的其它变型可用于对压缩的比特流进行解码。例如，解码器30可以在没有环路滤波器单元320的情况下生成输出视频流。例如，基于非变换的解码器30可以在没有针对某些块或帧的逆变换处理单元312的情况下直接逆量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中，视频解码器30可以具有组合成单个单元的逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312。Other variations of video decoder 30 may be used to decode the compressed bitstream. For example, the decoder 30 may generate the output video stream without the loop filter unit 320. For example, the non-transform based decoder 30 may directly inversely quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames. In another embodiment, the video decoder 30 may have an inverse quantization unit 310 and an inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.

具体的，在本申请实施例中，解码器30用于实现后文实施例中描述的视频解码方法。Specifically, in the embodiment of the present application, the decoder 30 is used to implement the video decoding method described in the embodiments below.

应当理解的是，视频解码器30的其它结构变化可用于解码经编码视频位流。例如，视频解码器30可以不经滤波器320处理而生成输出视频流；或者，对于某些图像块或者图像帧，视频解码器30的熵解码单元304没有解码出经量化的系数，相应地不需要经逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312处理。环路滤波器320是可选的；以及针对无损压缩的情况下，逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312是可选的。应当理解的是，根据不同的应用场景，帧间预测单元和帧内预测单元可以是被选择性的启用。It should be understood that other structural variations of video decoder 30 may be used to decode the encoded video bitstream. For example, the video decoder 30 may generate an output video stream without processing by the filter 320; or, for certain image blocks or image frames, the entropy decoding unit 304 of the video decoder 30 does not decode the quantized coefficients, and accordingly does not It needs to be processed by the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312. The loop filter 320 is optional; and in the case of lossless compression, the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312 are optional. It should be understood that, according to different application scenarios, the inter prediction unit and the intra prediction unit may be selectively enabled.

应当理解的是，本申请的编码器20和解码器30中，针对某个环节的处理结果可以经过进一步处理后，输出到下一个环节，例如，在插值滤波、运动矢量推导或环路滤波等环节之后，对相应环节的处理结果进一步进行Clip或移位shift等操作。It should be understood that in the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 of the present application, the processing results for a certain link can be further processed and output to the next link, for example, in interpolation filtering, motion vector derivation or loop filtering, etc. After the link, the results of the corresponding link are further clipped or shift shifted.

例如，按照相邻仿射编码块的运动矢量推导得到的当前图像块的控制点的运动矢量，或者推导得到的当前图像块的子块的运动矢量，可以经过进一步处理，本申请对此不做限定。例如，对运动矢量的取值范围进行约束，使其在一定的位宽内。假设允许的运动矢量的位宽为bitDepth，则运动矢量的范围为-2 ^bitDepth-1～2 ^bitDepth-1-1。如bitDepth为16，则取值范围为-32768～32767。如bitDepth为18，则取值范围为-131072～131071。又例如，对运动矢量(例如一个8×8图像块内的四个4×4子块的运动矢量MV)的取值进行约束，使得所述四个4×4子块MV的整数部分之间的最大差值不超过N个像素，例如不超过一个像素。 For example, the motion vector of the control point of the current image block derived from the motion vector of the adjacent affine coding block, or the motion vector of the sub-block derived from the current image block, can be further processed, and this application does not do this limited. For example, the value range of the motion vector is constrained to be within a certain bit width. Assuming that the bit width of the allowed motion vector is bitDepth, the range of the motion vector is -2 ^bitDepth-1 ~ 2 ^bitDepth-1 -1. If bitDepth is 16, the value ranges from -32768 to 32767. If bitDepth is 18, the value ranges from -131072 to 131071. For another example, the value of the motion vector (such as the motion vector MV of four 4×4 sub-blocks in an 8×8 image block) is constrained so that the integer parts of the four 4×4 sub-blocks MV The maximum difference of is no more than N pixels, for example no more than one pixel.

参见图4，图4是本申请实施例提供的视频译码设备400(例如视频编码设备400或视频解码设备400)的结构示意图。视频译码设备400适于实施本文所描述的实施例。在一个实施例中，视频译码设备400可以是视频解码器(例如图1A的解码器30)或视频编码器(例如图1A的编码器20)。在另一个实施例中，视频译码设备400可以是上述图1A的解码器30或图1A的编码器20中的一个或多个组件。Referring to FIG. 4, FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoding device 400 (for example, a video encoding device 400 or a video decoding device 400) provided by an embodiment of the present application. The video coding apparatus 400 is suitable for implementing the embodiments described herein. In one embodiment, the video coding device 400 may be a video decoder (eg, decoder 30 of FIG. 1A) or a video encoder (eg, encoder 20 of FIG. 1A). In another embodiment, the video decoding device 400 may be one or more components in the decoder 30 of FIG. 1A or the encoder 20 of FIG. 1A described above.

视频译码设备400包括：用于接收数据的入口端口410和接收单元(Rx)420，用于处理数据的处理器、逻辑单元或中央处理器(CPU)430，用于传输数据的发射器单元(Tx)440和出口端口450，以及，用于存储数据的存储器460。视频译码设备400还可以包括与入口端口410、接收器单元420、发射器单元440和出口端口450耦合的光电转换组件和电光(EO)组件，用于光信号或电信号的出口或入口。The video decoding device 400 includes: an inlet port 410 for receiving data and a receiving unit (Rx) 420, a processor for processing data, a logic unit or a central processing unit (CPU) 430, and a transmitter unit for transmitting data (Tx) 440 and exit port 450, and a memory 460 for storing data. The video decoding device 400 may further include a photoelectric conversion component and an electro-optical (EO) component coupled to the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, and the outlet port 450 for the outlet or inlet of the optical signal or the electrical signal.

处理器430通过硬件和软件实现。处理器430可以实现为一个或多个CPU芯片、核(例如，多核处理器)、FPGA、ASIC和DSP。处理器430与入口端口410、接收器单元420、发射器单元440、出口端口450和存储器460通信。处理器430包括译码模块470(例如编码模块470或解码模块470)。编码/解码模块470实现本文中所公开的实施例，以实现本申请实施例所提供的视频解码方法。例如，编码/解码模块470实现、处理或提供各种编码操作。因此，通过编码/解码模块470为视频译码设备400的功能提供了实质性的改进，并影响了视频译码设备400到不同状态的转换。或者，以存储在存储器460中并由处理器430执行的指令来实现编码/解码模块470。The processor 430 is implemented by hardware and software. The processor 430 may be implemented as one or more CPU chips, cores (eg, multi-core processors), FPGA, ASIC, and DSP. The processor 430 communicates with the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, the outlet port 450, and the memory 460. The processor 430 includes a decoding module 470 (for example, an encoding module 470 or a decoding module 470). The encoding/decoding module 470 implements the embodiments disclosed herein to implement the video decoding method provided by the embodiments of the present application. For example, the encoding/decoding module 470 implements, processes, or provides various encoding operations. Therefore, the encoding/decoding module 470 provides a substantial improvement to the function of the video decoding device 400 and affects the conversion of the video decoding device 400 to different states. Alternatively, the encoding/decoding module 470 is implemented with instructions stored in the memory 460 and executed by the processor 430.

存储器460包括一个或多个磁盘、磁带机和固态硬盘，可以用作溢出数据存储设备，用于在选择性地执行这些程序时存储程序，并存储在程序执行过程中读取的指令和数据。存储器460可以是易失性和/或非易失性的，可以是只读存储器(ROM)、随机存取存储器(RAM)、随机存取存储器(ternary content-addressable memory，TCAM)和/或静态随机存取存储器(SRAM)。The memory 460 includes one or more magnetic disks, tape drives, and solid-state hard disks, and can be used as an overflow data storage device for storing programs when these programs are selectively executed, as well as instructions and data read during program execution. The memory 460 may be volatile and/or non-volatile, and may be read only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), random access memory (ternary content-addressable memory (TCAM), and/or static Random Access Memory (SRAM).

参见图5，图5是根据一示例性实施例的可用作图1A中的源设备12和目的地设备14中的任一个或两个的装置500的简化框图。装置500可以实现本申请的技术。换言之，图5为本申请实施例的编码设备或解码设备(简称为译码设备500)的一种实现方式的示意性框图。其中，译码设备500可以包括处理器510、存储器530和总线***550。其中，处理器和存储器通过总线***相连，该存储器用于存储指令，该处理器用于执行该存储器存储的指令。译码设备的存储器存储程序代码，且处理器可以调用存储器中存储的程序代码执行本申请描述的各种视频编码或解码方法。为避免重复，这里不再详细描述。Referring to FIG. 5, FIG. 5 is a simplified block diagram of an apparatus 500 that can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1A according to an exemplary embodiment. The device 500 can implement the technology of the present application. In other words, FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of an implementation manner of an encoding device or a decoding device (referred to simply as a decoding device 500) according to an embodiment of the present application. The decoding device 500 may include a processor 510, a memory 530, and a bus system 550. The processor and the memory are connected through a bus system, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory. The memory of the decoding device stores program codes, and the processor can call the program codes stored in the memory to perform various video encoding or decoding methods described in this application. In order to avoid repetition, they are not described in detail here.

在本申请实施例中，该处理器510可以是中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit，简称为“CPU”)，该处理器510还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor 510 may be a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, referred to as "CPU"), and the processor 510 may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), and dedicated integrated Circuit (ASIC), ready-made programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.

该存储器530可以包括只读存储器(ROM)设备或者随机存取存储器(RAM)设备。任何其他适宜类型的存储设备也可以用作存储器530。存储器530可以包括由处理器510 使用总线550访问的代码和数据531。存储器530可以进一步包括操作***533和应用程序535，该应用程序535包括允许处理器510执行本申请描述的视频编码或解码方法(尤其是本申请描述的视频解码方法)的至少一个程序。例如，应用程序535可以包括应用1至N，其进一步包括执行在本申请描述的视频编码或解码方法的视频编码或解码应用(简称视频译码应用)。The memory 530 may include a read only memory (ROM) device or a random access memory (RAM) device. Any other suitable type of storage device may also be used as the memory 530. The memory 530 may include code and data 531 accessed by the processor 510 using the bus 550. The memory 530 may further include an operating system 533 and an application program 535 including at least one program that allows the processor 510 to perform the video encoding or decoding method described in this application (in particular, the video decoding method described in this application). For example, the application program 535 may include applications 1 to N, which further include a video encoding or decoding application (referred to as a video coding application for short) that performs the video encoding or decoding method described in this application.

该总线***550除包括数据总线之外，还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见，在图中将各种总线都标为总线***550。In addition to the data bus, the bus system 550 may also include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for clarity, various buses are marked as the bus system 550 in the figure.

可选的，译码设备500还可以包括一个或多个输出设备，诸如显示器570。在一个示例中，显示器570可以是触感显示器，其将显示器与可操作地感测触摸输入的触感单元合并。显示器570可以经由总线550连接到处理器510。Optionally, the decoding device 500 may also include one or more output devices, such as a display 570. In one example, the display 570 may be a tactile display that merges the display with a tactile unit that operably senses touch input. The display 570 may be connected to the processor 510 via the bus 550.

图6描述了四叉树，二叉树及扩展四叉树的划分方式，其中：Figure 6 describes the division of quadtree, binary tree and extended quadtree, among which:

QT是一种树状结构，表示一个节点可划分为四个子节点。现有视频编码标准采用基于四叉树的CTU划分方式：CTU作为根节点，每个节点对应于一个方形的区域；一个节点可以不再划分(此时它对应的区域为一个CU)，或者将这个节点划分成四个下一层级的节点，即把这个方形区域划分成四个大小相同的方形区域(其长、宽各为划分前区域长、宽的一半)，每个区域对应于一个节点。如6(a)所示。QT is a tree structure, which means that a node can be divided into four child nodes. Existing video coding standards use a quadtree-based CTU division method: CTU as the root node, each node corresponds to a square area; a node can no longer be divided (in this case, the corresponding area is a CU), or This node is divided into four next-level nodes, that is, the square area is divided into four square areas of the same size (the length and width of which are half of the length and width of the area before division), each area corresponds to a node . As shown in 6(a).

二叉树是一种树状结构，表示一个节点可划分成两个子节点。现有采用二叉树的编码方法中，一个二叉树结构上的节点可以不划分，或者把此节点划分成两个下一层级的节点。划分成两个节点的方式有两种：1)水平二分，将节点对应的区域划分成上、下两个相同大小的区域，每个区域对应于一个节点，如6(b)所示；或者2)竖直二分，将节点对应的区域划分成左、右两个大小相同的区域，每个区域对应于一个节点，如6(c)所示。A binary tree is a tree structure, which means that a node can be divided into two child nodes. In the existing coding method using a binary tree, a node on a binary tree structure may not be divided, or the node may be divided into two nodes at the next level. There are two ways to divide it into two nodes: 1) Horizontal dichotomy, divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size, one for each node, as shown in 6(b); or 2) Vertical dichotomy, divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size on the left and right, each area corresponds to a node, as shown in 6(c).

扩展四叉树(Extended Quad-Tree，EQT)是一种工字划分结构，一个节点可划分成四个子节点。划分成三个节点的方式有两种：1)水平四分，将节点对应的区域划分成上、中、下三个区域，每个区域对应于一个节点，其中上、中左、中右、下三个区域的高分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/2、1/4，中左和中右宽度为节点高度的1/2、1/2，如6(d)所示；或者2)竖直四分，将节点对应的区域划分成左、中上、中下、右三个区域，每个区域对应于一个节点，其中左、中、右三个区域的宽分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/2、1/4，中上和中下宽度为节点高度的1/2、1/2，如6(e)所示。现有采用扩展四叉树的编码方法中，一个扩展四叉树结构上的节点可以不划分，或者把此节点按BT或EQT的方式继续划分成下一层级的节点。Extended Quad-Tree (Extended-Quad-Tree, EQT) is an I-shaped partition structure, a node can be divided into four sub-nodes. There are two ways to divide it into three nodes: 1) Horizontal quartering, which divides the area corresponding to the node into upper, middle and lower areas, each area corresponds to a node, of which upper, middle left, middle right, The heights of the next three areas are 1/4, 1/2, 1/2, 1/4 of the node height, and the width of the middle left and right are 1/2, 1/2 of the height of the node, such as 6(d) As shown; or 2) Vertical quartering, the area corresponding to the node is divided into three areas: left, middle upper, middle lower, and right, each area corresponds to a node, wherein the width of the left, middle, and right areas They are 1/4, 1/2, 1/2, and 1/4 of the node height, respectively, and the upper, middle, and lower widths are 1/2 and 1/2 of the node height, as shown in 6(e). In the existing coding method using the extended quadtree, a node on the structure of the extended quadtree may not be divided, or the node may be further divided into nodes of the next level in the manner of BT or EQT.

H.265视频编码标准把一帧图像分割成互不重叠的编码树单元(CTU)，CTU的大小可设置为64×64(CTU的大小也可设置为其它值，如JVET参考软件JEM中CTU大小增大为128×128或256×256)。64×64的CTU包含由64列、每列64个像素的矩形像素点阵，每个像素包含亮度分量或/和色度分量。The H.265 video coding standard divides a frame of images into non-overlapping coding tree units (CTU). The size of the CTU can be set to 64×64 (the size of the CTU can also be set to other values, such as CTU in the JVET reference software JEM The size increases to 128×128 or 256×256). A 64×64 CTU contains a rectangular pixel lattice of 64 pixels in each column and each pixel contains a luminance component or/and a chrominance component.

使用基于四叉树(quad-tree，简称QT)的CTU划分方法，将CTU作为四叉树的根节点(root)，按照四叉树的划分方式，将CTU递归划分成若干个叶节点(leaf node)。一个节点对应于一个图像区域，节点如果不划分，则节点称为叶节点，它对应的图像区域形成一个CU；如果节点继续划分，则节点对应的图像区域划分成四个相同大小的区域(其长和宽各为被划分区域的一半)，每个区域对应一个节点，需要分别确定这些节点是否还会划分。一个节点是否划分由码流中这个节点对应的划分标志位split_cu_flag指示。一个节点A划分一次得到4个节点Bi，i＝0,1,2,3，Bi称为A的子节点，A称为Bi的父节点。根节点的四叉树层级(qtDepth)为0，节点的四叉树层级为节点的父节点的四叉树层级加1。为表述简洁，下文中节点的大小和形状即指节点对应的图像区域的大小和形状。Using the quad-tree (QT)-based CTU division method, the CTU is used as the root node of the quad-tree, and the CTU is recursively divided into several leaf nodes (leaf) according to the quad-tree division method node). A node corresponds to an image area. If the node is not divided, the node is called a leaf node, and its corresponding image area forms a CU; if the node continues to be divided, the image area corresponding to the node is divided into four areas of the same size (which The length and width are each half of the divided area), each area corresponds to a node, you need to determine whether these nodes will be divided. Whether a node is divided is indicated by the split flag bit split_cu_flag corresponding to this node in the code stream. A node A is divided into four nodes Bi at a time, i=0, 1, 2, 3, Bi is called a child node of A, and A is called a parent node of Bi. The quad-tree level (qtDepth) of the root node is 0, and the quad-tree level of the node is the quad-tree level of the parent node of the node plus 1. For simplicity, the size and shape of the node in the following refers to the size and shape of the image area corresponding to the node.

更具体的，对64×64的CTU节点(四叉树层级为0)，根据它对应的split_cu_flag，可选择不划分，成为1个64×64的CU，或者选择划分为4个32×32的节点(四叉树层级为1)。这四个32×32的节点中的每一个节点，又可以根据它对应的split_cu_flag，选择继续划分或者不划分；如果一个32×32的节点继续划分，则产生四个16×16的节点(四叉树层级为2)。以此类推，直到所有节点都不再划分，这样一个CTU就被划分成一组CU。CU的最小尺寸(size)在序列参数集(Sequence Parameter Set，SPS)中标识，例如8×8为最小CU。在上述递归划分过程中，如果一个节点的尺寸等于最小CU尺寸(minimum CU size)，这个节点默认为不再划分，同时也不需要在码流中包含它的划分标志位。More specifically, for a 64×64 CTU node (the quadtree level is 0), according to its corresponding split_cu_flag, you can choose not to divide into 1 64×64 CU, or choose to divide into 4 32×32 Node (quadtree level is 1). Each of the four 32×32 nodes can choose to continue or not to divide according to its corresponding split_cu_flag; if a 32×32 node continues to divide, four 16×16 nodes (four The fork tree level is 2). By analogy, until all nodes are no longer divided, such a CTU is divided into a group of CU. The minimum size of the CU is identified in a sequence parameter set (SPS), for example, 8×8 is the minimum CU. In the above recursive division process, if the size of a node is equal to the minimum CU size (minimum CU size), the node defaults to no division, and it does not need to include its division flag in the code stream.

当解析到一个节点为叶节点后，此叶节点为一个CU，进一步解析CU对应的编码信息(包括CU的预测模式、变换系数等信息，例如H.265中的coding_unit()语法结构体)，然后按照这些编码信息对CU进行预测、反量化、反变换、环路滤波等解码处理，产生这个CU对应的重建图像。四叉树结构使得CTU能够根据图像局部特点划分成合适大小的一组CU，例如平滑区域划分成较大的CU，而纹理丰富区域划分为较小的CU。When a node is parsed as a leaf node, the leaf node is a CU, and further parses the coding information corresponding to the CU (including the CU prediction mode, transform coefficients and other information, such as the coding_unit() syntax structure in H.265), Then, according to these coding information, the CU is subjected to decoding processing such as prediction, inverse quantization, inverse transform, and loop filtering to generate a reconstructed image corresponding to this CU. The quadtree structure allows the CTU to be divided into a group of CUs of appropriate size according to the local characteristics of the image, for example, smooth regions are divided into larger CUs, and texture-rich regions are divided into smaller CUs.

一种CTU划分成一组CU的划分方式对应于一个编码树(coding tree)。CTU应当采用何种编码树则通常通过编码器的率失真优化(rate distortion optimization，RDO)技术来确定。编码器尝试多种CTU划分方式，每一种划分方式对应于一个率失真代价(RD cost)；编码器比较各种尝试过的划分方式的RD cost，找到RD cost最小的划分方式，作为该CTU最优的划分方式，用于该CTU的实际编码。编码器尝试的各种CTU划分方式均需要符合解码器规定的划分规则，这些才能够被解码器正确识别。A CTU divided into a group of CUs corresponds to a coding tree (coding tree). The coding tree that the CTU should use is usually determined by the rate-distortion optimization (RDO) technology of the encoder. The encoder tries a variety of CTU division methods, each of which corresponds to a rate-distortion cost (RD cost); the encoder compares the RD costs of various tried division methods and finds the division method with the smallest RD cost as the CTU The optimal division method is used for the actual coding of the CTU. The various CTU division methods tried by the encoder need to meet the division rules specified by the decoder, so that these can be correctly recognized by the decoder.

多用途视频编码测试模型(Versatile video coding Test Model，VTM)参考软件在四叉树划分的基础上，增加了二叉树(binary tree，BT)划分方式和三叉树(ternary tree，TT)划分方式。其中，VTM是JVET组织开发的新式编解码器参考软件。The multi-purpose video coding test model (Versatile Video Coding Test Model, VTM) reference software adds a binary tree (BT) division method and a ternary tree (TT) division method based on the quadtree division. Among them, VTM is a new codec reference software developed by JVET.

二叉树划分将一个节点划分成2个子节点，具体的二叉树划分方式有两种：Binary tree division divides a node into two child nodes. There are two specific binary tree division methods:

1)水平二分：将节点对应的区域划分成上、下两个相同大小的区域(即宽不变，高变为划分前区域的一半)，每个区域对应于一个节点；如6(b)所示。1) Horizontal dichotomy: divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size (that is, the width is unchanged, the height becomes half of the area before division), and each area corresponds to a node; such as 6(b) As shown.

2)竖直二分：将节点对应的区域划分成左、右两个相同大小的区域(即高不变，宽变为划分前区域的一半)；如6(c)所示。2) Vertical dichotomy: Divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size on the left and right (that is, the height remains unchanged, and the width becomes half of the area before division); as shown in 6(c).

三叉树划分将一个节点划分成3个子节点，具体的三叉树划分方式有两种：The trigeminal tree division divides a node into three child nodes. There are two specific trigeminal tree division methods:

1)水平三分：将节点对应的区域划分成上、中、下三个区域，每个区域对应于一个节点，其中上、中、下三个区域的高分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4，如6(d)所示；1) Horizontal three-point division: the area corresponding to the node is divided into upper, middle and lower areas, each area corresponds to a node, and the heights of the upper, middle and lower areas are 1/4 of the node height, respectively. 1/2, 1/4, as shown in 6(d);

2)竖直三分：将节点对应的区域划分成左、中、右三个区域，每个区域对应于一个节点，其中左、中、右三个区域的宽分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4，如6(e)所示2) Vertical three-point division: the area corresponding to the node is divided into three areas of left, center and right, each area corresponds to a node, and the widths of the left, center and right areas are 1/4 of the height of the node , 1/2, 1/4, as shown in 6(e)

VTM中使用了QT级联BT/TT的划分方式(Quad Tree plus Multi-Type Tree，QT-MTT)划分方式。更具体的，CTU通过QT划分，产生QT叶节点，QT中的节点可使用四叉树划分继续划分成四个QT子节点，或者不使用四叉划分产生一个QT叶节点。QT叶节点作为MTT的根节点。MTT中的节点可使用水平二分、竖直二分、水平三分、竖直三分这四种划分方式中的一种划分为子节点，或者不再划分成为一个MTT叶节点。MTT的叶节点为一个编码单元CU。VTM uses the QT cascaded BT/TT division (Quad Tree plus Multi-Type Tree, QT-MTT) division method. More specifically, the CTU generates QT leaf nodes through QT division. The nodes in QT can be further divided into four QT child nodes using quadtree division, or a QT leaf node can be generated without using quadtree division. The QT leaf node serves as the root node of the MTT. The nodes in the MTT can be divided into child nodes using one of the four division methods: horizontal dichotomy, vertical dichotomy, horizontal trisection, and vertical trisection, or they can no longer be divided into MTT leaf nodes. The leaf node of MTT is a coding unit CU.

图7给出了使用QT-MTT将一个CTU划分成a到p等16个CU的示例。图7右图中每个端点表示一个节点，一个节点连出4根线表示四叉树划分，一个节点连出2根线表示二叉树划分，一个节点连出3根线表示三叉树划分。实线表示QT划分，虚线表示多类型划分(Multi-Type Tree，MTT)的第一层划分，点划线表示MTT的第二层划分。a到p为16个MTT叶节点，每个MTT叶节点为1个CU。一个CTU按照图7右图的划分方式，得到了如图7左图所示的CU划分图。Figure 7 shows an example of using QT-MTT to divide a CTU into 16 CUs such as a to p. Each end point in the right figure of FIG. 7 represents a node, a node connected with 4 lines represents a quadtree division, a node connected with 2 lines represents a binary tree division, and a node connected with 3 lines represents a trigeminal tree division. The solid line represents the QT division, the dotted line represents the first layer division of Multi-Type Tree (MTT), and the dot-and-dash line represents the second layer division of MTT. a to p are 16 MTT leaf nodes, and each MTT leaf node is 1 CU. A CTU is divided into the CU as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 7 according to the division method of the right diagram of FIG. 7.

QT-MTT划分方式中，每个CU具有QT层级(Quad-tree depth，QT depth，也称为QT深度)和MTT层级(Multi-Type Tree depth，MTT depth，也称为MTT深度)。QT层级表示CU所属的QT叶节点的QT层级，MTT层级表示CU所属MTT叶节点的MTT层级。编码树的根节点的QT层级为0，MTT层级为0。如果编码树上一个节点使用QT划分，则划分得到的子节点的QT层级为该节点的QT层级加1，MTT层级不变；相似的，如果编码树上一个节点使用MTT划分(即BT或TT划分之一)，则划分得到的子节点的MTT层级为该节点的MTT层级加1，QT层级不变。例如图1中a、b、c、d、e、f、g、i、j的QT层级为1，MTT层级为2；h的QT层级为1，MTT层级为1；n、o、p的QT层级为2，MTT层级为0；l、m的QT层级为2，MTT层级为1。如果CTU只划分成一个CU，则此CU的QT层级为0，MTT层级为0。In the QT-MTT division method, each CU has a QT level (Quad-tree depth, QT depth, also called QT depth) and an MTT level (Multi-Type Tree depth, MTT depth, also called MTT depth). The QT level represents the QT level of the QT leaf node to which the CU belongs, and the MTT level represents the MTT level of the MTT leaf node to which the CU belongs. The QT level of the root node of the coding tree is 0, and the MTT level is 0. If a node on the coding tree uses QT division, the QT level of the divided child node is the QT level of the node plus 1, the MTT level remains unchanged; similarly, if a node on the coding tree uses MTT division (ie BT or TT One of the divisions), then the MTT level of the divided child node is the MTT level of the node plus 1, and the QT level remains unchanged. For example, in Figure 1, the QT level of a, b, c, d, e, f, g, i, j is 1, MTT level is 2; the QT level of h is 1, the MTT level is 1; n, o, p The QT level is 2, and the MTT level is 0; the QT level of l and m is 2, and the MTT level is 1. If the CTU is divided into only one CU, the QT level of this CU is 0 and the MTT level is 0.

在最新的AVS3的制定过程中，AVS3在四叉树划分的基础上，增加了二叉树(binary tree，BT)划分方式和扩展四叉树(Extended Quad-Tree，EQT)划分方式。In the process of formulating the latest AVS3, AVS3 added a binary tree (BT) division method and an extended quad-tree (EQT) division method on the basis of the quadtree division.

二叉树划分将一个节点划分成2个子节点，具体的两叉树划分方式有两种：Binary tree division divides a node into two child nodes. There are two specific ways to divide a binary tree:

1)水平二分(horizontal binary tree，HBT)：将节点对应的区域划分成上、下两个相同大小的区域(即宽不变，高变为划分前区域的一半)，每个区域对应于一个节点；如6(b)所示。1) Horizontal binary (HBT): Divide the area corresponding to the node into the upper and lower areas of the same size (that is, the width is unchanged, the height becomes half of the area before division), each area corresponds to one Node; as shown in 6(b).

2)竖直二分(vertical binary tree，VBT)：将节点对应的区域划分成左、右两个相同大小的区域(即高不变，宽变为划分前区域的一半)；如6(c)所示。2) Vertical binary (VBT): Divide the area corresponding to the node into two areas of the same size on the left and right (that is, the height is unchanged, the width becomes half of the area before division); such as 6(c) As shown.

扩展四叉树划分将一个节点划分成4个子节点，具体的扩展四叉树划分方式有两种：Extended quadtree division divides a node into 4 sub-nodes. There are two specific ways to expand a quadtree:

1)水平四分(horizontal Extended Quad-Tree，HEQT)，将节点对应的区域划分成上、中、下三个区域，每个区域对应于一个节点，其中上、中左、中右、下三个区域的高分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/2、1/4，中左和中右宽度为节点高度的1/2、1/2，如6(d)所示；1) Horizontal Extended (Quad-Tree, HEQT), the area corresponding to the node is divided into upper, middle and lower areas, each area corresponds to a node, of which upper, middle left, middle right and lower three The height of each area is 1/4, 1/2, 1/2, 1/4 of the node height, and the width of the center left and center right is 1/2, 1/2 of the node height, as shown in 6(d) ;

2)竖直四分(vertical Extended Quad-Tree，VEQT)，将节点对应的区域划分成左、中上、中下、右三个区域，每个区域对应于一个节点，其中左、中、右三个区域的宽分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/2、1/4，中上和中下宽度为节点高度的1/2、1/2，如6(e)所示。2)Vertical Extended Quad-Tree (VEQT), the area corresponding to the node is divided into three areas of left, middle upper, middle lower, and right, and each area corresponds to a node, of which left, middle, and right The width of the three areas is 1/4, 1/2, 1/2, 1/4 of the node height, and the width of the upper middle and lower is 1/2, 1/2 of the height of the node, as shown in 6(e) Show.

AVS3中使用了QT级联BT/EQT的划分方式，即第一级编码树上的节点只能使用QT划分成子节点，第一级编码树的叶节点为第二级编码树的根节点；第二级编码树上的节点可使用BT或EQT划分方式中的一种划分为子节点；第二级编码树的叶节点为编码单元。需要注意的是，当叶节点为BT或EQT划分方式时，其叶节点只能使用BT或EQT划分方式，而不能使用QT的方式。AVS3 uses the QT cascade BT/EQT division method, that is, the nodes on the first-level coding tree can only be divided into child nodes using QT. The leaf nodes of the first-level coding tree are the root nodes of the second-level coding tree; The nodes on the second-level coding tree can be divided into child nodes using one of the BT or EQT division methods; the leaf nodes of the second-level coding tree are coding units. It should be noted that when a leaf node is divided into BT or EQT, its leaf nodes can only use BT or EQT, but not QT.

经过上述的各种划分之后，编码树下的叶子节点位置的图像块作为编码单元，视频编码主要包括帧内预测(Intra Prediction)、帧间预测(Inter Prediction)、变换(Transform)、量化(Quantization)、熵编码(Entropy encode)、环内滤波(in-loop filtering)(主要为去块滤波，de-blocking filtering)等环节。将图像划分为编码块之后进行帧内预测或者帧间预测，并且在得到残差之后进行变换量化，最终进行熵编码并输出码流。此处编码块为由像素点组成的M×N大小的阵列(M可以等于N，也可以不等于N)，并且已知各个像素点位置的像素值。After the above-mentioned various divisions, the image block at the position of the leaf node under the coding tree is used as the coding unit. Video coding mainly includes intra prediction (Intra Prediction), inter prediction (Inter Prediction), transformation (Transform), and quantization (Quantization) ), Entropy encoding, in-loop filtering (mainly de-blocking filtering) and other links. After the image is divided into coding blocks, intra prediction or inter prediction is performed, and after the residual is obtained, transform and quantization are performed, and finally entropy coding is performed and the code stream is output. Here, the coding block is an M×N size array composed of pixels (M may be equal to N or may not be equal to N), and the pixel value of each pixel position is known.

帧内预测是指利用当前图像内已重建区域内像素点的像素值对当前编码块内像素点的像素值进行预测。Intra prediction refers to using the pixel values of pixels in the reconstructed area in the current image to predict the pixel values of pixels in the current coding block.

帧间预测是在已重建的图像中，为当前图像中的当前编码块寻找匹配的参考块，从而得到当前编码块的运动信息，然后根据运动信息计算出当前编码块中像素点的像素值的预测信息或者预测值(以下不再区分信息和值)。其中，计算运动信息的过程称为运动估计(Motion estimation，ME)，计算出当前编码块中像素点的像素值的预测值的过程称为运动补偿(Motion compensation，MC)。Inter prediction is to find a matching reference block for the current coding block in the current image in the reconstructed image, so as to obtain the motion information of the current coding block, and then calculate the pixel value of the pixel in the current coding block according to the motion information Predicted information or predicted value (in the following no longer distinguish between information and value). Among them, the process of calculating motion information is called Motion Estimation (ME), and the process of calculating the predicted value of the pixel value of the pixel in the current coding block is called Motion Compensation (MC).

需要说明的是，当前编码块的运动信息包括了预测方向的指示信息(通常为前向预测、后向预测或者双向预测)，一个或两个指向参考块的运动矢量(Motion vector，MV)，以及参考块所在图像的指示信息(通常记为参考帧索引，Reference index)。It should be noted that the motion information of the current coding block includes indication information of the prediction direction (usually forward prediction, backward prediction or bidirectional prediction), one or two motion vectors (Motion vector, MV) pointing to the reference block, And the indication information of the image where the reference block is located (usually referred to as reference frame index, Reference).

前向预测是指当前编码块从前向参考图像集合中选择一个参考图像获取参考块。后向预测是指当前编码块从后向参考图像集合中选择一个参考图像获取参考块。双向预测是指从前向和后向参考图像集合中各选择一个参考图像获取参考块。当使用双向预测方法时，当前编码块会存在两个参考块，每个参考块各自需要运动矢量和参考帧索引进行指示，然后根据两个参考块内像素点的像素值确定当前块内像素点像素值的预测值。Forward prediction means that the current coding block selects one reference image from the set of forward reference images to obtain the reference block. Backward prediction means that the current coding block selects a reference image from the set of backward reference images to obtain the reference block. Bidirectional prediction refers to selecting a reference image from a set of forward and backward reference images to obtain a reference block. When using the bidirectional prediction method, there will be two reference blocks in the current coding block, each reference block needs a motion vector and a reference frame index to indicate, and then determine the pixels in the current block according to the pixel values of the pixels in the two reference blocks The predicted value of the pixel value.

运动估计过程需要为当前编码块在参考图像中尝试多个参考块，最终使用哪一个或者哪几个参考块用作预测则使用率失真优化(Rate-distortion optimization，RDO)或者其他方法确定。The motion estimation process needs to try multiple reference blocks in the reference image for the current coding block. Which one or several reference blocks to use for prediction is determined using Rate-distortion Optimization (RDO) or other methods.

利用帧内预测或者帧间预测得到预测信息之后，当前编码块内像素点的像素值减去对应的预测信息便得到残差信息，然后利用离散余弦变换(Discrete Cosine Transformation，DCT)等方法对残差信息进行变换，再使用量化熵编码得到码流。预测信号加上重建残差信号之后需进一步进行滤波操作，进而得到重建信号，并将其作为后续编码的参考信号。After obtaining prediction information using intra prediction or inter prediction, the pixel value of the pixel in the current coding block is subtracted from the corresponding prediction information to obtain the residual information, and then the discrete cosine transform (Discrete Cosine Transformation, DCT) and other methods are used to resolve the residual information. The difference information is transformed, and then quantized entropy coding is used to obtain a code stream. After the prediction signal is added to the reconstructed residual signal, a further filtering operation is required to obtain a reconstructed signal, which is used as a reference signal for subsequent encoding.

解码则相当于编码的逆过程。例如，首先利用熵解码反量化反变换得到残差信息，解码码流以确定当前编码块使用的是帧内预测还是帧间预测。如果是帧内预测，则利用周围已重建区域内像素点的像素值按照所使用的帧内预测方法构建预测信息。如果是帧间预测，则需要解析出运动信息，并使用所解析出的运动信息在已重建的图像中确定参考块，并将块内像素点的像素值作为预测信息，此过程称为运动补偿(Motion compensation，MC)。使用预测信息加上残差信息经过滤波操作便可以得到重建信息。Decoding is equivalent to the reverse process of encoding. For example, first, entropy decoding, inverse quantization and inverse transformation are used to obtain residual information, and the code stream is decoded to determine whether the current coding block uses intra prediction or inter prediction. In the case of intra prediction, prediction information is constructed according to the intra prediction method used by using pixel values of pixels in the surrounding reconstructed area. If it is inter prediction, you need to parse out the motion information, and use the parsed motion information to determine the reference block in the reconstructed image, and use the pixel values of the pixels in the block as prediction information. This process is called motion compensation. (Motion compensation, MC). The reconstruction information can be obtained by using the prediction information plus the residual information through a filtering operation.

下述实施例为根据一帧图像的码流对该图像进行解码的过程，尤其是确定该图像中的图像块的划分方式的过程。为了便于说明，设定一个坐标的定义，针对当前图像块中的每个VPDU，以该VPDU左上角的顶点为坐标原点举例说明，横轴正方向向右，纵轴正方向向下。The following embodiment is a process of decoding an image according to the code stream of an image, in particular, a process of determining the division method of image blocks in the image. For the convenience of explanation, a coordinate definition is set. For each VPDU in the current image block, the vertex at the upper left corner of the VPDU is taken as an example of the coordinate origin. The positive direction of the horizontal axis is right and the positive direction of the vertical axis is downward.

本申请实施例一的技术方案The technical solution of Embodiment 1 of this application

在编码一帧图像时，首先将该图像划分为等大小的图像块，称为最大编码单元LCU，对一个LCU进行递归的划分操作，可以得到一个或多个CU。LCU的尺寸有两种选择，128×128或64×64。示例性的，在下面描述中，均假设LCU的尺寸为128×128，LCU大小为64×64的原理与LCU的尺寸为128×128的原理类似，不再赘述。When encoding a frame of image, first divide the image into equal-sized image blocks, called the largest coding unit LCU, and recursively divide an LCU to obtain one or more CUs. There are two options for the size of the LCU, 128×128 or 64×64. Exemplarily, in the following description, it is assumed that the size of the LCU is 128×128, and the principle of the size of the LCU is 64×64 is similar to the principle of the size of the LCU is 128×128, and will not be repeated.

图8是示出根据本申请一种实施例的视频解码方法的流程图。该过程800可由视频解码器30执行。过程800描述为一系列的步骤或操作，应当理解的是，过程800可以以各种顺序执行和/或同时发生，不限于图8所示的执行顺序。如图8所示，该方法包括：8 is a flowchart illustrating a video decoding method according to an embodiment of the present application. This process 800 may be performed by the video decoder 30. The process 800 is described as a series of steps or operations. It should be understood that the process 800 may be performed in various orders and/or simultaneously, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 8. As shown in Figure 8, the method includes:

步骤801、获取当前图像块的块信息。Step 801: Acquire block information of the current image block.

当前图像块是当前图像划分出的一个图像块，对应于当前图像的编码树上的一个节点，当前图像块可以是当前图像的一个CTU，也可以是以CTU为根节点划分得到的子块，还可以是以某一层级的子块为根节点划分得到的下一层级的子块。当前图像块的块信息可以包括当前图像块的尺寸信息，例如当前图像块的宽、高或者基于宽高得到的面积，还可以包括当前图像块中像素点的坐标，该像素点的坐标以当前图像的左上顶点为原点，向右为x轴正向，向下为y轴正向，块信息还可以当前图像块对应的其他图像相关信息，这些块信息能够从当前图像的码流中解析得到。The current image block is an image block divided by the current image, corresponding to a node on the coding tree of the current image. The current image block may be a CTU of the current image, or a sub-block obtained by dividing the CTU as the root node. A sub-block of the next level obtained by dividing a sub-block of a certain level as a root node may also be used. The block information of the current image block may include the size information of the current image block, such as the width, height, or area obtained based on the width and height of the current image block, and may also include the coordinates of the pixel points in the current image block. The top left vertex of the image is the origin, the right is the positive x-axis, and the downward is the positive y-axis. The block information can also be other image-related information corresponding to the current image block. These block information can be parsed from the current image code stream .

步骤802、根据块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用。Step 802: Determine whether the division modes in the set of optional division modes are available according to the block information.

对于一个图像块，其可选划分方式集合包括至少一个划分方式，例如，VBT划分方式、HBT划分方式、VEQT划分方式、HEQT划分方式和QT划分方式，本申请实施例的可选划分方式集合还包括不划分方式，即当前图像块就是一个叶子节点，作为一个CU进行编解码处理。需要说明的是，可选划分方式集合中还可以包含其它的划分方式，本申请对此不做限定。For an image block, the set of optional division methods includes at least one division method, for example, VBT division method, HBT division method, VEQT division method, HEQT division method, and QT division method. Including no division method, that is, the current image block is a leaf node, which is used as a CU to perform encoding and decoding processing. It should be noted that the set of optional division methods may also include other division methods, which is not limited in this application.

本申请实施例可以根据当前图像块的块信息判断可选划分方式集合中的哪些划分方式可用，哪些划分方式不可用。如果可用的划分方式只有一种，则解码设备解码当前图像块时使用这种划分方式就可以正常解码。In this embodiment of the present application, it is possible to determine which division modes in the set of available division modes are available and which are not available according to the block information of the current image block. If there is only one available division method, the decoding device can decode normally by using this division method when decoding the current image block.

以下示例性的描述本申请中解码设备确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的过程，需要说明的是，该过程包括但不限于条件集合的方法，而条件集合所包括的多个条件不分先后顺序。The following exemplarily describes the process of determining whether the division mode in the optional division mode set is available by the decoding device in this application. It should be noted that the process includes, but is not limited to, a condition set method, and the condition set includes multiple conditions No order.

关于不划分方式是否可用：解码设备根据当前图像块的块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第一判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第一判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则不划分方式不可用，确定变量allow_NoSplit＝0；若当前图像块不满足第一判定条件集合中的所有条件，则不划分方式可用，确定变量allow_NoSplit＝1。Regarding whether the non-division method is available: the decoding device determines whether the current image block meets the conditions in the first determination condition set according to the block information of the current image block; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the first determination condition set, it is not divided If the mode is not available, determine the variable allow_NoSplit=0; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the first determination condition set, then no division mode is available, and determine the variable allow_NoSplit=1.

上述第一判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件，例如，第一判定条件集合可以是条件(1)和(3)的组合，或者(1)、(2)及(3)的组合：The first judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions. For example, the first judgment condition set may be a combination of conditions (1) and (3), or a combination of (1), (2), and (3):

(1)当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为最大编码单元LCU的边长，此处MaxLCU为128；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the largest coding unit LCU, where MaxLCU is 128;

(2)当前图像块的长边与短边的比值大于maxAspectRatio，maxAspectRatio为大于等于1的整数，例如4；(2) The ratio of the long side to the short side of the current image block is greater than maxAspectRatio, and maxAspectRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 4;

需要说明的是，本申请中的当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的边界并不是指当前图像块中超出图像边界的范围内还有像素值，而是指当前图像块中沿某一个方向或者两个方向的最大坐标值超出了图像边界沿着相同方向的坐标值。It should be noted that the current image block in this application exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located does not mean that there are still pixel values in the range of the current image block beyond the image boundary, but it refers to a certain direction or The maximum coordinate value in both directions exceeds the coordinate value of the image boundary along the same direction.

(4)当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于等于16的整数，例如64；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than pipelineSize, pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16, such as 64;

关于HBT划分方式是否可用：解码设备根据当前图像块的块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第二判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第二判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则HBT划分方式不可用，确定变量allowSplitBtHor＝0；若当前图像块不满足第二判定条件集合中的所有条件，则HBT划分方式可用，确定变量allowSplitBtHor＝1。Regarding whether the HBT division method is available: the decoding device determines whether the current image block meets the conditions in the second judgment condition set according to the block information of the current image block; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the second judgment condition set, the HBT division If the mode is not available, determine the variable allowSplitBtHor=0; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the second determination condition set, the HBT division mode is available, and the variable allowSplitBtHor=1 is determined.

上述第二判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件，例如，第二判定条件集合可以是条件(1)和(5)的组合，或者(1)、(2)及(3)的组合：The above second judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions. For example, the second judgment condition set may be a combination of conditions (1) and (5), or a combination of (1), (2), and (3):

(1)当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长，此处MaxLCU为128；(1) The current image block is I slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, MaxLCU is the side length of LCU, where MaxLCU is 128;

(2)当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数，例如，N包括64、32、16、8或4，默认值为64；(2) The size of the current image block is 128×N, N is a natural number less than 128, for example, N includes 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4, the default value is 64;

(4)当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数，例如64；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than or equal to pipelineSize, pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 64;

(6)当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于8的整数，例如128；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 8, such as 128;

(7)当前图像块的高等于最小CU边长minCUSize，minCUSize例如为4或8；(7) The height of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length minCUSize, for example, minCUSize is 4 or 8;

(8)当前图像块未超出当前图像块所在图像的边界，且当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数，例如8或者4；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the width and height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 8 or 4;

(10)当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数，例如10。(10) The level of binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 10.

关于VBT划分方式是否可用：解码设备根据当前图像块的块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第三判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第三判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则VBT划分方式不可用，确定变量allowSplitBtVer＝0；若当前图像块不满足第三判定条件集合中的所有条件，则VBT划分方式可用，确定变量allowSplitBtVer＝1。Regarding whether the VBT division method is available: the decoding device judges whether the current image block meets the conditions in the third judgment condition set according to the block information of the current image block; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the third judgment condition set, the VBT division If the mode is not available, determine the variable allowSplitBtVer=0; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the third set of judgment conditions, the VBT division mode is available, and the variable allowSplitBtVer=1 is determined.

上述第三判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件，例如，第三判定条件集合可以是条件(1)和(3)的组合，或者(1)、(2)及(3)的组合：The third determination condition set includes one or more of the following conditions. For example, the third determination condition set may be a combination of conditions (1) and (3), or a combination of (1), (2), and (3):

(1)当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU 为LCU的边长，此处MaxLCU为128；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of LCU, where MaxLCU is 128;

(2)当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数，例如，M包括64、32、16、8或4，默认值为64；(2) The size of the current image block is M×128, M is a natural number less than 128, for example, M includes 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4, the default value is 64;

(5)当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于1，例如1/8或者1/4；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1, such as 1/8 or 1/4;

(6)当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于16的整数，例如128；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16, such as 128;

(7)当前图像块的宽等于最小CU边长minCUSize，minCUSize例如为4或8；(7) The width of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length minCUSize, for example, minCUSize is 4 or 8;

(8)当前图像块未超出当前图像块所在图像的边界，且当前图像块的高与宽的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数，例如4；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the height and width of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 4;

(9)当前图像块的高大于pipelineSize，且宽小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数，例如64；(9) The height of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the width is less than or equal to pipelineSize, pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 64;

当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次的初始值为0，当前图像块每使用一次BT划分方式，该层次的值就加1。The initial value of the hierarchy of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is 0, and each time the current image block uses the BT division mode, the value of the hierarchy is increased by 1.

关于HEQT划分方式是否可用：解码设备根据当前图像块的块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第四判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第四判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则HEQT划分方式不可用，确定变量allowSplitEqtHor＝0；若当前图像块不满足第四判定条件集合中的所有条件，则HEQT划分方式可用，确定变量allowSplitEqtHor＝1。Regarding whether the HEQT division method is available: according to the block information of the current image block, the decoding device judges whether the current image block satisfies the conditions in the fourth judgment condition set; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the fourth judgment condition set, the HEQT division If the mode is unavailable, determine the variable allowSplitEqtHor=0; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the fourth judgment condition set, the HEQT division mode is available, and the variable allowSplitEqtHor=1 is determined.

上述第四判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件，例如，第四判定条件集合可以是条件(1)和(4)的组合，或者(1)、(4)及(5)的组合：The fourth judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions. For example, the fourth judgment condition set may be a combination of conditions (1) and (4), or a combination of (1), (4), and (5):

(3)当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数，例如，M包括64、32、16、8或4，默认值为64；(3) The size of the current image block is M×128, M is a natural number less than 128, for example, M includes 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4, the default value is 64;

(4)当前图像块超过当前图像块所在图像的边界，且当前图像块的尺寸为128×N或M×128，M和N分别为小于128的自然数，例如，M和N分别包括64、32、16、8或4，默认值均为64；(4) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the size of the current image block is 128×N or M×128, M and N are natural numbers less than 128, for example, M and N include 64 and 32, respectively , 16, 8, or 4, the default value is 64;

(5)当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数，例如8或者4；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 8 or 4;

(6)当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxEQTSize，maxEQTSize为大于或等于16的整数，例如64；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxEQTSize, and maxEQTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16, such as 64;

(7)当前图像块的高小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者宽等于minCUSize，minCUSize 为最小CU边长，例如4或8；(7) The height of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the width is equal to minCUSize, minCUSize is the minimum CU side length, such as 4 or 8;

(8)当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatioEQT，maxRatioEQT为大于或等于1的整数，例如2；(8) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatioEQT, and maxRatioEQT is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 2;

当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次的初始值为0，当前图像块每使用一次HEQT划分方式，该层次的值就加1。The initial value of the hierarchy of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is 0, and each time the current image block uses the HEQT division mode, the value of the hierarchy is increased by 1.

关于VEQT划分方式是否可用：根据当前图像块的块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第五判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第五判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则VEQT划分方式不可用，确定变量allowSplitEqtVer＝0；若当前图像块不满足第五判定条件集合中的所有条件，则VEQT划分方式可用，确定变量allowSplitEqtVer＝1。Regarding whether the VEQT division method is available: according to the block information of the current image block, determine whether the current image block meets the conditions in the fifth judgment condition set; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the fifth judgment condition set, the VEQT division method is not available Use to determine the variable allowSplitEqtVer=0; if the current image block does not meet all the conditions in the fifth judgment condition set, the VEQT division method is available, and the variable allowSplitEqtVer=1 is determined.

上述第五判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件，例如，第五判定条件集合可以是条件(1)和(4)的组合，或者(1)、(4)及(5)的组合：The fifth judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions. For example, the fifth judgment condition set may be a combination of conditions (1) and (4), or a combination of (1), (4), and (5):

(1)当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长，此处maxLCU为128；(1) The current image block is I band or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, MaxLCU is the side length of LCU, where maxLCU is 128;

(7)当前图像块的宽小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者高等于minCUSize，minCUSize为最小CU边长，例如4或8；(7) The width of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the height is equal to minCUSize, minCUSize is the minimum CU side length, such as 4 or 8;

(9)当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数，例如10。(9) The level of binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 10.

当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次的初始值为0，当前图像块每使用一次VEQT划分方式，该层次的值就加1。The initial value of the level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is 0. Each time the current image block uses the VEQT division method, the value of this level is increased by 1.

关于QT划分方式是否可用：解码设备根据当前图像块的块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第六判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第六判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则QT划分方式不可用，确定变量allowSplitQt＝0；若当前图像块不满足第六判定条件集合中的所有条件，则QT划分方式可用，确定变量allowSplitQt＝1。Regarding whether the QT division method is available: according to the block information of the current image block, the decoding device judges whether the current image block meets the conditions in the sixth judgment condition set; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the sixth judgment condition set, the QT division If the mode is not available, determine the variable allowSplitQt=0; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the sixth judgment condition set, the QT division mode is available, and the variable allowSplitQt=1 is determined.

上述第六判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件，例如，第六判定条件集合可以是条件(5)和(7)的组合，或者(1)、(2)及(6)的组合：The sixth judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions. For example, the sixth judgment condition set may be a combination of conditions (5) and (7), or a combination of (1), (2), and (6):

(1)当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数，例如，N包括64、32、16、8或4，默认值为64；(1) The size of the current image block is 128×N, N is a natural number less than 128, for example, N includes 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4, the default value is 64;

(3)当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数，例如8或者4；(3) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 8 or 4;

(4)当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于，例如1/8或者1/4；(4) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to, such as 1/8 or 1/4;

(5)当前图像块的至少一个边长小于minQtSize，minQtSize为大于或等于4的整数，可选64、32、16、8或4等，默认值为4；(5) At least one side length of the current image block is less than minQtSize, minQtSize is an integer greater than or equal to 4, optional 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4, etc. The default value is 4;

步骤803、从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定当前图像块的划分方式。Step 803: Determine the division mode of the current image block from the determined available division modes.

解码设备可以根据可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定当前图像块的划分方式。即若QT划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则当前图像块的划分方式为QT划分方式；若QT划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析码流以确定当前图像块的划分方式。当QT划分方式不可用时，若不划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除不划分方式和QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则当前图像块的划分方式为不划分方式；若不划分方式可用，且可选划分方式集合中除不划分方式和QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析码流以确定当前图像块的划分方式。The decoding device may determine the division mode of the current image block according to the judgment result of whether division modes in the selectable division mode set are available. That is, if the QT division method is available, and all division methods except the QT division method in the selectable division method set are unavailable, the current image block division method is the QT division method; if the QT division method is available, and the optional division method is available At least one division mode other than QT division mode in the set is available, then the code stream is parsed to determine the division mode of the current image block. When the QT division method is not available, if no division method is available, and all division methods except the non-division method and the QT division method in the selectable division method set are unavailable, the current image block division method is the non-division method; if Non-division modes are available, and at least one division mode other than non-division modes and QT division modes is available in the set of available division modes, the code stream is parsed to determine the division mode of the current image block.

示例性的，假设变量split_cu_flag＝1表示当前图像块使用QT划分方式，split_cu_flag＝0表示当前图像块不使用QT划分方式。bt_split_flag＝1表示当前图像块使用BT划分方式或EQT划分方式，bt_split_flag＝0表示当前图像块不使用BT划分方式和EQT划分方式。在步骤802之后，本申请实施例可以采用下述方法确定当前图像块的划分方式，需要说明的是，上述变量是举例说明，本申请不做具体限定。Exemplarily, it is assumed that the variable split_cu_flag=1 indicates that the current image block uses the QT division method, and split_cu_flag=0 indicates that the current image block does not use the QT division method. bt_split_flag=1 means that the current image block uses the BT division method or the EQT division method, and bt_split_flag=0 means that the current image block does not use the BT division method and the EQT division method. After step 802, the embodiment of the present application may use the following method to determine the division method of the current image block. It should be noted that the above variables are examples, and this application does not specifically limit it.

a)如果allowSplitQt＝1，且allow_NoSplit、allowSplitBtHor、allowSplitBtVer、allowSplitEqtHor和allowSplitEqtVer中至少有一个为1，则解析码流确定split_cu_flag。a) If allowSplitQt=1, and at least one of allow_NoSplit, allowSplitBtHor, allowSplitBtVer, allowSplitEqtHor and allowSplitEqtVer is 1, then parse the code stream to determine split_cu_flag.

b)如果allowSplitQt＝1，且allow_NoSplit、allowSplitBtHor、allowSplitBtVer、allowSplitEqtHor和allowSplitEqtVer均为0，则当前图像块使用QT划分方式，可得split_cu_flag＝1。b) If allowSplitQt=1, and allow_NoSplit, allowSplitBtHor, allowSplitBtVer, allowSplitEqtHor, and allowSplitEqtVer are all 0, then the current image block uses the QT division method, and split_cu_flag=1 can be obtained.

c)allowSplitQt＝0，则当前图像块不使用QT划分方式，可得split_cu_flag＝0。c) allowSplitQt=0, then the current image block does not use the QT division method, and it can be obtained that split_cu_flag=0.

如果split_cu_flag＝0执行下述步骤。If split_cu_flag = 0, perform the following steps.

d)如果allow_NoSplit＝1，且allowSplitBtHor、allowSplitBtVer、allowSplitEqtHor和allowSplitEqtVer中至少有一个为1，则解析码流确定bt_split_flag。d) If allow_NoSplit=1, and at least one of allowSplitBtHor, allowSplitBtVer, allowSplitEqtHor and allowSplitEqtVer is 1, then parse the code stream to determine bt_split_flag.

e)如果allow_NoSplit＝1，且allowSplitBtHor、allowSplitBtVer、allowSplitEqtHor和allowSplitEqtVer均为0，则当前图像块使用不划分方式，可得bt_split_flag＝0。e) If allow_NoSplit=1 and allowSplitBtHor, allowSplitBtVer, allowSplitEqtHor, and allowSplitEqtVer are all 0, then the current image block is not divided, and bt_split_flag=0 can be obtained.

f)如果allow_NoSplit＝0，则当前图像块不使用不划分方式，可得bt_split_flag＝1。f) If allow_NoSplit=0, the current image block does not use the non-split mode, and bt_split_flag=1 can be obtained.

如果得到bt_split_flag＝1执行下述步骤。If bt_split_flag=1 is obtained, perform the following steps.

g)根据allowSplitBtHor、allowSplitBtVer、allowSplitEqtHor和allowSplitEqtVer确定当前图像块使用的划分方式为BT或EQT中的竖直划分还是水平划分，以下给出判断方法的例子。g) According to allowSplitBtHor, allowSplitBtVer, allowSplitEqtHor, and allowSplitEqtVer, determine whether the current image block is divided into a vertical division or a horizontal division in BT or EQT. The following gives examples of judgment methods.

如果allowSplitBtHor＝1，且allowSplitBtVer、allowSplitEqtHor和allowSplitEqtVer均为0，则当前图像块使用HBT划分方式。If allowSplitBtHor=1, and allowSplitBtVer, allowSplitEqtHor, and allowSplitEqtVer are all 0, the current image block uses the HBT division method.

如果allowSplitBtVe＝1，且allowSplitBtHor、allowSplitEqtHor和allowSplitEqtVer均为0，则当前图像块使用VBT划分方式。If allowSplitBtVe=1 and allowSplitBtHor, allowSplitEqtHor, and allowSplitEqtVer are all 0, the current image block uses the VBT division method.

如果allowSplitEqtHor＝1，且allowSplitBtHor、allowSplitBtVer和allowSplitEqtVer均为0，则当前图像块使用HEQT划分方式。If allowSplitEqtHor=1, and allowSplitBtHor, allowSplitBtVer, and allowSplitEqtVer are all 0, then the current image block uses the HEQT division method.

如果allowSplitEqtVer＝1，且allowSplitBtHor、allowSplitBtVer和allowSplitEqtHor均为0，则当前图像块使用VEQT划分方式。If allowSplitEqtVer=1, and allowSplitBtHor, allowSplitBtVer, and allowSplitEqtHor are all 0, the current image block uses the VEQT division method.

解码设备还可以解析码流以确定当前图像块的划分方式。例如，先解析划分类型是BT还是EQT，再解析划分方向是竖直划分还是水平划分；还可以是先解析划分方向，再解析划分类型。以下以先解析划分类型，再解析划分方向为例进行说明。The decoding device can also parse the code stream to determine how to divide the current image block. For example, first analyze whether the division type is BT or EQT, and then analyze whether the division direction is vertical division or horizontal division; it is also possible to first analyze the division direction and then analyze the division type. The following is an example of analyzing the division type first and then the division direction.

解码设备从码流中先解析得到bqtSplitTypeFlag，再解析得到bqtSplitDirFlag。bqtSplitTypeFlag用于指示当前图像块的划分类型，bqtSplitTypeFlag＝1表示当前图像块使用BT划分，bqtSplitTypeFlag＝0表示当前图像块使用EQT划分。bqtSplitDirFlag用于指示当前图像块的划分方向，bqtSplitDirFlag＝1表示当前图像块执行竖直划分，bqtSplitDirFlag＝0表示当前图像块使用水平划分。The decoding device first parses from the code stream to obtain bqtSplitTypeFlag, and then parses to obtain bqtSplitDirFlag. bqtSplitTypeFlag is used to indicate the division type of the current image block, bqtSplitTypeFlag=1 indicates that the current image block uses BT division, and bqtSplitTypeFlag=0 indicates that the current image block uses EQT division. bqtSplitDirFlag is used to indicate the division direction of the current image block, bqtSplitDirFlag=1 indicates that the current image block performs vertical division, and bqtSplitDirFlag=0 indicates that the current image block uses horizontal division.

如果bqtSplitTypeFlag＝1，bqtSplitDirFlag＝1，当前图像块使用VBT划分方式。If bqtSplitTypeFlag=1 and bqtSplitDirFlag=1, the current image block uses the VBT division method.

如果bqtSplitTypeFlag＝1，bqtSplitDirFlag＝0，当前图像块使用HBT划分方式。If bqtSplitTypeFlag=1 and bqtSplitDirFlag=0, the current image block uses the HBT division method.

如果bqtSplitTypeFlag＝0，bqtSplitDirFlag＝1，当前图像块使用VEQT划分方式。If bqtSplitTypeFlag=0 and bqtSplitDirFlag=1, the current image block uses the VEQT division method.

如果bqtSplitTypeFlag＝0，bqtSplitDirFlag＝0，当前图像块使用HEQT划分方式。If bqtSplitTypeFlag=0 and bqtSplitDirFlag=0, the current image block uses the HEQT division method.

步骤804、根据当前图像块的划分方式从当前图像块得到一个CU或多个CU。Step 804: Obtain a CU or multiple CUs from the current image block according to the division method of the current image block.

当当前图像块的划分方式为不划分方式时，当前图像块即为一个CU；当当前图像块的划分方式为可选划分方式集合中除不划分方式外的任一划分方式时，根据当前图像块的划分方式对当前图像块进行划分，若划分得到的子块的至少一个边长为T，T为4或者8，则子块为一个CU，否则对子块采用步骤802-803的方式继续确定划分方式。When the division mode of the current image block is non-division mode, the current image block is a CU; when the division mode of the current image block is any division mode in the set of optional division modes except non-division mode, according to the current image The block division method divides the current image block. If at least one side length of the divided sub-block is T, T is 4 or 8, the sub-block is a CU, otherwise, the steps 802-803 are continued for the sub-block Determine the division method.

步骤805、解析包含当前图像块的码流获取一个CU或多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。Step 805: Parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of one CU or multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

解码设备从当前图像块所在图像的码流中解析每个CU的语法元素，获得每个CU的预测信息和残差信息，根据CU的预测模式对其执行帧间预测处理或帧内预测处理，得到CU的帧间预测图像或帧内预测图像。再根据CU的残差信息，将变换系数经过反量化和反变换处理得到残差图像，并叠加到CU的预测图像上，得到CU的重建块。The decoding device parses the syntax elements of each CU from the code stream of the image where the current image block is located, obtains prediction information and residual information of each CU, and performs inter prediction processing or intra prediction processing on the CU according to its prediction mode, Obtain the inter prediction image or intra prediction image of the CU. According to the residual information of the CU, the transform coefficients are subjected to inverse quantization and inverse transform processing to obtain a residual image, which is superimposed on the predicted image of the CU to obtain a reconstructed block of the CU.

本申请实施例二的技术方案The technical solution of the second embodiment of the present application

图9是示出根据本申请一种实施例的视频解码方法的流程图。该过程900可由视频解码器30执行。过程900描述为一系列的步骤或操作，应当理解的是，过程900可以以各种顺序执行和/或同时发生，不限于图9所示的执行顺序。如图9所示，该方法包括：9 is a flowchart illustrating a video decoding method according to an embodiment of the present application. This process 900 may be performed by the video decoder 30. The process 900 is described as a series of steps or operations. It should be understood that the process 900 may be performed in various orders and/or simultaneously, and is not limited to the order of execution shown in FIG. 9. As shown in Figure 9, the method includes:

步骤901、获取当前图像块的块信息。Step 901: Obtain block information of the current image block.

步骤902、根据块信息确定当前图像块的默认划分方式。Step 902: Determine the default division mode of the current image block according to the block information.

解码设备可以根据以下方法来确定当前图像块的默认划分方式，默认划分方式是指当前图像块的划分方式无需通过解析码流得到，直接使用该默认划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。The decoding device can determine the default division mode of the current image block according to the following method. The default division mode means that the division mode of the current image block does not need to be obtained by parsing the code stream, and the default division mode is used to divide the current image block directly.

本申请实施例可以根据当前图像块的块信息确定当前图像块的默认划分方式。以下示例性的描述本申请中解码设备确定默认划分方式的过程，需要说明的是，该过程包括但不限于条件集合的方法，而条件集合所包括的多个条件不分先后顺序。In this embodiment of the present application, the default division mode of the current image block may be determined according to the block information of the current image block. The following exemplarily describes the process of determining the default division mode of the decoding device in the present application. It should be noted that the process includes but is not limited to the method of the condition set, and the multiple conditions included in the condition set are in no particular order.

关于默认划分方式是否为QT划分方式：解码设备根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第七判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第七判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则默认划分方式为QT划分方式，确定变量forceSplitQT＝1，否则forceSplitQT＝0。Regarding whether the default division mode is the QT division mode: the decoding device judges whether the current image block meets the conditions in the seventh judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the seventh judgment condition set, the default division mode For the QT division method, determine the variable forceSplitQT=1, otherwise forceSplitQT=0.

上述第七判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：The above seventh judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(2)当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且当前图像块的宽和高分别等于maxLCU，maxLCU包括64、128或者256，默认值为128。(2) The current image block is I slice or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to maxLCU, maxLCU includes 64, 128 or 256, and the default value is 128.

关于默认划分方式是否为VBT划分方式：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第八判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第八判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则默认划分方式为VBT划分方式，确定变量forceSplitBtVer＝1，否则forceSplitBtVer＝0。Regarding whether the default division mode is VBT division mode: determine whether the current image block satisfies the conditions in the eighth judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the eighth judgment condition set, the default division mode is VBT For the division method, determine the variable forceSplitBtVer=1, otherwise forceSplitBtVer=0.

上述第八判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：The above eighth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且当前图像块的宽和高不满足：宽等于K，高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，可选32、64、128或256，默认K为64，L为128，当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not meet: width equals K, height equals L, K is less than L, and K and L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively , Optional 32, 64, 128 or 256, the default K is 64, L is 128, the current image block is forced to use VBT division;

(2)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且当前图像块的宽和高满足：宽等于K，高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，例如K为128，L为64，当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: width equal to K, height equal to L, K greater than L, K and L are integers greater than or equal to 32, For example, K is 128 and L is 64, and the current image block is forced to use the VBT division method.

关于默认划分方式是否为HBT划分方式：根据块信息判断当前图像块是否满足第九判定条件集合中的条件；若当前图像块满足第九判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则默认划分方式为HBT划分方式，确定变量forceSplitBtHor＝1，否则forceSplitBtHor＝0。Regarding whether the default division mode is the HBT division mode: according to the block information, it is judged whether the current image block meets the conditions in the ninth judgment condition set; if the current image block meets at least one condition in the ninth judgment condition set, the default division mode is HBT The division method determines the variable forceSplitBtHor=1, otherwise forceSplitBtHor=0.

上述第九判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：The above ninth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且当前图像块的宽和高不满足：宽等于K，高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，可选32、64、128或256，默认K为128，L为64，当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not meet: width equals K, height equals L, K is greater than L, and K and L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively , Optional 32, 64, 128 or 256, the default K is 128, L is 64, the current image block is forced to use HBT division;

(2)当前图像块超出当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且当前图像块的宽和高满足：宽等于K，高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，例如K为64，L为128，当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: width equal to K, height equal to L, K less than L, K and L are integers greater than or equal to 32, For example, K is 64 and L is 128, and the current image block is forced to use the HBT division method.

步骤903、对当前图像块采用默认划分方式进行划分得到多个CU。Step 903: Divide the current image block by a default division method to obtain multiple CUs.

步骤904、解析包含当前图像块的码流获取多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。Step 904: Parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

如果当前图像块没有可使用的默认划分方式，则解码设备可以根据块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，可选划分方式集合包括VBT划分方式，HBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和QT划分方式；从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定当前图像块的划分方式；对当前图像块采用当前图像块的划分方式进行划分得到多个CU；解析码流获取多个CU的解码信息，并根据解码信息对CU解码得到重建块。If the current image block does not have a default division method that can be used, the decoding device can determine whether the division method in the set of optional division methods is available according to the block information. The set of optional division methods includes the VBT division method, the HBT division method, and the horizontal expansion quad. Tree HEQT division method, vertical expansion quadtree VEQT division method and QT division method; determine the division method of the current image block from the determined available division methods; the current image block is divided by the current image block division method. CU; parsing the code stream to obtain decoding information of multiple CUs, and decoding the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstruction block.

本申请中解码设备在当前图像块不能使用默认划分方式时，可以使用上述实施例一的方法确定当前图像块的划分方式，也可以使用其他的方法确定当前图像块的划分方式，本申请对此不做具体限定。In this application, when the current image block cannot use the default division method, the decoding device may use the method of the first embodiment to determine the division method of the current image block, or may use other methods to determine the division method of the current image block. No specific restrictions.

示例性的，解码设备可以以如下方法确定当前图像块的划分方式：Exemplarily, the decoding device may determine the division method of the current image block as follows:

a)仅当当前图像块的宽和高均>＝MinQtSize时，才允许使用QT划分方式，确定allowSplitQt＝0。MinQtSize在SPS中传输，可选64、32、16、8或4等，默认值为4。a) Only when the width and height of the current image block are both >=MinQtSize, the QT division method is allowed to be used, and allowSplitQt=0 is determined. MinQtSize is transmitted in SPS, and can be 64, 32, 16, 8 or 4, etc. The default value is 4.

b)当前图像块的宽和高均<＝MaxBtSize时，才可以使用HBT划分方式或VBT划分方式，确定allowSplitBtVer＝1或allowSplitBtHor＝1。MaxBtSize在SPS中传输，可选128、64、32或16等，默认值为128。b) Only when the width and height of the current image block are <=MaxBtSize, can the HBT division method or the VBT division method be used to determine allowSplitBtVer=1 or allowSplitBtHor=1. MaxBtSize is transmitted in SPS, and can be 128, 64, 32 or 16, etc. The default value is 128.

c)仅当当前图像块的宽和高均<＝MaxEqtSize时，才可以使用HEQT划分方式或者VEQT划分方式，确定allowSplitEqtVer＝0或allowSplitEqtHor＝0。MaxEqtSize在SPS中传输，可选64或32等，默认值为64。c) Only when the width and height of the current image block are <=MaxEqtSize, can the HEQT division mode or the VEQT division mode be used to determine allowSplitEqtVer=0 or allowSplitEqtHor=0. MaxEqtSize is transmitted in SPS, 64 or 32 can be selected, and the default value is 64.

d)如果当前图像块的高＝minCUSize，则不允许使用HBT划分方式，确定d) If the height of the current image block = minCUSize, HBT division is not allowed, determine

allowSplitBtVer＝0。其中，minCUSize为最小CU边长，例如4或8。allowSplitBtVer=0. Among them, minCUSize is the minimum CU side length, such as 4 or 8.

e)如果当前图像块的宽＝minCUSize，则不允许使用VBT划分方式，确定e) If the width of the current image block = minCUSize, VBT division is not allowed, determine

f)如果当前图像块的高<＝minCUSize×2，或者宽＝minCUSize，则不允许使用HEQT划分方式，确定allowSplitEqtHor＝0，minCUSize为最小CU边长，例如4或8。f) If the height of the current image block<=minCUSize×2, or the width=minCUSize, the HEQT division method is not allowed, and allowSplitEqtHor=0 is determined, and minCUSize is the minimum CU side length, such as 4 or 8.

g)如果当前图像块的宽<＝minCUSize×2，或者高＝minCUSize，则不允许使用VEQT划分方式，确定allowSplitEqtVer＝0，minCUSize为最小CU边长，例如4或8。g) If the width of the current image block is <=minCUSize×2, or the height=minCUSize, the VEQT division method is not allowed, and allowSplitEqtVer=0 is determined, and minCUSize is the minimum CU side length, such as 4 or 8.

h)若当前图像块高与宽的比值＝MaxPartSizeRatio，则不能选择QT划分方式、VBT划分方式和VEQT划分方式，确定allowSplitBtVer＝0，allowSplitEqtVer＝0，allowSplitQt＝0。MaxPartSizeRatio在SPS中传输，可选8、4或者2等，默认值为8。h) If the ratio of the current image block height to width = MaxPartSizeRatio, the QT division method, VBT division method and VEQT division method cannot be selected, and allowSplitBtVer=0, allowSplitEqtVer=0, and allowSplitQt=0 are determined. MaxPartSizeRatio is transmitted in SPS, and can be 8, 4, or 2, etc. The default value is 8.

i)若当前图像块的宽与高的比值＝MaxPartSizeRatio，则不能选择QT划分方式、HBT划分方式和HEQT划分方式，确定allowSplitBtHor＝0，allowSplitEqtHor＝0，allowSplitQt＝0。MaxPartSizeRatio在SPS中传输，可选8、4或者2等，默认值为8。i) If the ratio of the width to the height of the current image block = MaxPartSizeRatio, the QT division method, HBT division method and HEQT division method cannot be selected, and allowSplitBtHor=0, allowSplitEqtHor=0, and allowSplitQt=0 are determined. MaxPartSizeRatio is transmitted in SPS, and can be 8, 4, or 2, etc. The default value is 8.

图10为本申请实施例中的视频解码装置1000的一种示意性框图。该视频解码装置1000可以包括：获取模块1001，用于获取当前图像块的块信息；判断模块1002，用于根据所述块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，所述可选划分方式集合包括不划分方式；确定模块1003，用于从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定所述当前图像块的划分方式；划分模块1004，用于根据所述当前图像块的划分方式从所述当前图像块得到一个CU或多个CU，其中所述一个CU是应用所述不划分方式由当前图像块得到的；解码模块1005，用于解析包含所述当前图像块的码流获取所述一个或多个CU的解码信息，并根据所述解码信息对所述CU解码得到重建块。FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a video decoding apparatus 1000 in an embodiment of this application. The video decoding device 1000 may include: an acquisition module 1001 for acquiring block information of a current image block; a determination module 1002 for determining whether a division mode in a set of alternative division modes is available according to the block information, the optional The division mode set includes no division mode; the determination module 1003 is used to determine the division mode of the current image block from the determined available division modes; the division module 1004 is used to divide the division mode according to the current image block division mode Obtaining one CU or multiple CUs from the current image block, wherein the one CU is obtained from the current image block using the non-dividing method; the decoding module 1005 is used to parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain the Decoding information of one or more CUs, and decoding the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述可选划分方式集合还包括水平二叉树HBT划分方式，垂直二叉树VBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和四叉树QT划分方式。In a feasible implementation manner, the set of optional division modes further includes a horizontal binary tree HBT division mode, a vertical binary tree VBT division mode, a horizontally expanded quadtree HEQT division mode, a vertically expanded quadtree VEQT division mode, and a quadtree Tree QT division method.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述判断模块1002，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第一判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第一判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述不划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第一判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述不划分方式可用；In a feasible implementation manner, the judgment module 1002 is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the first judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the first At least one condition in a determination condition set, the non-division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the first determination condition set, the non-division method is available;

其中，所述第一判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the first set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为最大编码单元LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the largest coding unit LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的长边与短边的比值大于maxAspectRatio，maxAspectRatio为大于等于1的整数；(2) The ratio of the long side to the short side of the current image block is greater than maxAspectRatio, and maxAspectRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(3)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界；(3) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(4)所述当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于等于16的整数；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than pipelineSize, and pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(5)所述当前图像块的高大于pipelineSize，且宽小于pipelineSize。(5) The height of the current image block is larger than the pipelineSize, and the width is smaller than the pipelineSize.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述判断模块1002，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第二判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第二判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述HBT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第二判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述HBT划分方式可用；In a feasible implementation manner, the judgment module 1002 is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the second judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the first At least one condition in the second judgment condition set, the HBT division mode is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the second judgment condition set, the HBT division mode is available;

其中，所述第二判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the second judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU， MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, and MaxLCU is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且所述当前图像块的宽大于K，高等于K，K包括128、64、32、16、8或4；(3) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width of the current image block is greater than K, and the height is equal to K, where K includes 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4;

(4)所述当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than or equal to pipelineSize, and pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(5)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界或右下边界；(5) The current image block exceeds the right or lower right border of the image where the current image block is located;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于8的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 8;

(7)所述当前图像块的高等于最小CU边长；(7) The height of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块未超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the width and height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(9) The ratio of the width to the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(10)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(10) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述判断模块1002，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第三判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第三判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述VBT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第三判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述VBT划分方式可用；In a feasible implementation manner, the judgment module 1002 is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the third judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the first At least one condition in the three determination condition set, the VBT division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the third determination condition set, the VBT division method is available;

其中，所述第三判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the third set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界或右下边界；(3) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary or lower right boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(4)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且所述当前图像块的宽等于K，高大于K，K包括128、64、32、16、8或4；(4) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width of the current image block is equal to K, and the height is greater than K, where K includes 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4;

(5)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于1；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)所述当前图像块的宽等于最小CU边长；(7) The width of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块未超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的高与宽的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the height to the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)所述当前图像块的高大于pipelineSize，且宽小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数；(9) The height of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the width is less than or equal to pipelineSize, and pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述判断模块1002，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第四判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第四判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述HEQT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第四判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述HEQT划分方式可用；In a feasible implementation manner, the judgment module 1002 is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the fourth judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the first At least one condition in the four decision condition sets, the HEQT division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the fourth decision condition set, the HEQT division method is available;

其中，所述第四判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the fourth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(3)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(3) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(4)所述当前图像块超过所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N或M×128，M和N分别为小于128的自然数；(4) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the size of the current image block is 128×N or M×128, and M and N are natural numbers less than 128, respectively;

(5)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxEQTSize，maxEQTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxEQTSize, and maxEQTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)所述当前图像块的高小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者宽等于minCUSize，minCUSize为最小CU边长；(7) The height of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the width is equal to minCUSize, and minCUSize is the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatioEQT，maxRatioEQT为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The ratio of the width to the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatioEQT, and maxRatioEQT is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界；(9) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述判断模块1002，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第五判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第五判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述VEQT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第五判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述VEQT划分方式可用；In a feasible implementation manner, the judgment module 1002 is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the fifth judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the first Five at least one condition in the judgment condition set, the VEQT division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the fifth judgment condition set, the VEQT division method is available;

其中，所述第五判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the fifth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(7)所述当前图像块的宽小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者高等于minCUSize，minCUSize为最小CU边长；(7) The width of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the height is equal to minCUSize, and minCUSize is the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界；(8) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(9)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(9) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述判断模块1002，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第六判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第六判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述QT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第六判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述QT划分方式可用；In a feasible implementation manner, the judgment module 1002 is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the sixth judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the first At least one condition in the six determination condition sets, the QT division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the sixth determination condition set, the QT division method is available;

其中，所述第六判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the sixth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(1) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(3) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(4)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于；(4) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to;

(5)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长小于minQtSize，minQtSize为大于或等于4的整数；(5) At least one side length of the current image block is less than minQtSize, and minQtSize is an integer greater than or equal to 4;

(6)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于0；(6) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than 0;

(7)所述当前图像块超过所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界或右边界。(7) The current image block exceeds the lower or right boundary of the image where the current image block is located.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述确定模块1003，具体用于根据所述可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定所述当前图像块的划分方式；或者，解析所述码流以确定所述当前图像块的划分方式。In a feasible implementation manner, the determination module 1003 is specifically configured to determine the division method of the current image block according to a determination result of whether division methods in the set of optional division methods are available; or, parse the The code stream determines the division of the current image block.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述确定模块1003，具体用于若QT划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述QT划分方式；若所述QT划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析所述码流以确定所述当前图像块的划分方式。In a feasible implementation manner, the determination module 1003 is specifically configured to: if a QT division method is available and all division methods in the set of optional division methods except the QT division method are unavailable, then The division method of the current image block is the QT division method; if the QT division method is available and at least one division method other than the QT division method is available in the set of optional division methods, the code is parsed Stream to determine how to divide the current image block.

在一种可行的实施方式中，若所述QT划分方式不可用，则所述确定模块1003，还用于若所述不划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述不划分方式和所述QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述不划分方式；若所述不划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述不划分方式和所述QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析所述码流以确定所述当前图像块的划分方式。In a feasible implementation manner, if the QT division mode is not available, the determining module 1003 is further used to divide the non-divided mode set from the set of optional division modes if the non-partition mode is available All the division modes except the QT division mode and the QT division mode are unavailable, the division mode of the current image block is the non-division mode; if the non-division mode is available, and the set of optional division modes is If at least one division mode other than the non-division mode and the QT division mode is available, the code stream is parsed to determine the division mode of the current image block.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述划分模块1004，具体用于当所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述不划分方式时，所述当前图像块为一个所述CU；当所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述可选划分方式集合中除所述不划分方式外的任一划分方式时，根据所述当前图像块的划分方式对所述当前图像块进行划分，若划分得到的子块的至少一个边长为T，T为4或8，则所述子块为一个所述CU，否则对所述子块继续划分。In a feasible implementation manner, the dividing module 1004 is specifically configured to: when the current image block is divided into the non-divided mode, the current image block is a CU; when the current When the division mode of the image block is any division mode other than the non-division mode in the set of optional division modes, the current image block is divided according to the division mode of the current image block, if the division is obtained At least one side length of the sub-block is T, and T is 4 or 8, then the sub-block is one of the CU, otherwise, the sub-block is further divided.

图11为本申请实施例中的视频解码装置1100的一种示意性框图。该视频解码装置1100可以包括：获取模块1101，用于获取当前图像块的块信息；默认模块1102，用于根据所述块信息确定所述当前图像块的默认划分方式；划分模块1103，用于对所述当前图像块采用所述默认划分方式进行划分得到多个编码单元CU；解码模块1104，用于解析包含所述当前图像块的码流获取所述多个CU的解码信息，并根据所述解码信息对所述CU解码得到重建块。FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a video decoding apparatus 1100 in an embodiment of this application. The video decoding device 1100 may include: an obtaining module 1101, used to obtain the block information of the current image block; a default module 1102, used to determine the default division mode of the current image block according to the block information; a division module 1103, used to Divide the current image block by the default division method to obtain multiple coding units CU; a decoding module 1104 is used to parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of the multiple CUs, and according to the The decoding information decodes the CU to obtain a reconstructed block.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述默认模块1102，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第七判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第七判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述默认划分方式为四叉树QT划分方式；In a feasible implementation manner, the default module 1102 is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block meets the conditions in the seventh determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the first At least one condition in the set of seven determination conditions, the default division mode is a quadtree QT division mode;

其中，所述第七判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the seventh judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右下边界；(1) The current image block exceeds the lower right border of the image where the current image block is located;

(2)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的宽和高分别等于maxLCU，maxLCU包括64、128或者256。(2) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to maxLCU, respectively, and maxLCU includes 64, 128, or 256.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述默认模块1102，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第八判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第八判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述默认划分方式为垂直二叉树VBT划分方式；In a feasible implementation manner, the default module 1102 is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block meets the conditions in the eighth determination condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets the first 8. At least one condition in the set of determination conditions, the default division mode is a vertical binary tree VBT division mode;

其中，所述第八判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the eighth determination condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高不满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, and K is less than L, K And L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively, and the current image block is forced to use the VBT division method;

(2)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, K is greater than L, K and L is an integer greater than or equal to 32, and the current image block is forced to use the VBT division method.

在一种可行的实施方式中，所述默认模块1102，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第九判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第九判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述默认划分方式为水平二叉树HBT划分方式；In a feasible implementation manner, the default module 1102 is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block meets the conditions in the ninth determination condition set based on the block information; if the current image block meets the first 9. At least one condition in the set of judgment conditions, the default division mode is a horizontal binary tree HBT division mode;

其中，所述第九判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the ninth determination condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高不满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, and K is greater than L, K And L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively, and the current image block is forced to use the HBT division method;

(2)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, K is less than L, K and L is an integer greater than or equal to 32, and the current image block is forced to use the HBT division method.

在图11所示实施例基础上，图12为本申请实施例中的视频解码装置1100的一种示意性框图。该视频解码装置1100还可以包括：还包括：判断模块1105，用于根据所述块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，所述可选划分方式集合包括VBT划分方式，HBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和QT划分方式；确定模块1106，用于从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定所述当前图像块的划分方式；所述划分模块1103，还用于对所述当前图像块采用所述当前图像块的划分方式进行划分得到多个CU；所述解码模块1104，还用于解析所述码流获取所述多个CU的解码信息，并根据所述解码信息对所述CU解码得到重建块。Based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a video decoding apparatus 1100 in an embodiment of the present application. The video decoding apparatus 1100 may further include: a judgment module 1105, configured to determine whether a division mode in an optional division mode set is available according to the block information, and the optional division mode set includes a VBT division mode and an HBT division mode Mode, horizontally expanding quadtree HEQT division mode, vertically expanding quadtree VEQT division mode and QT division mode; the determination module 1106 is used to determine the division mode of the current image block from the determined available division modes; The dividing module 1103 is further used to divide the current image block by using the current image block division method to obtain multiple CUs; the decoding module 1104 is also used to parse the code stream to obtain the multiple CUs Decoding information, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.

需要说明的是，本申请实施例的帧间预测装置中的各个模块为实现本申请帧间预测方法中所包含的各种执行步骤的功能主体，即具备实现完整实现本申请帧间预测方法中的各个步骤以及这些步骤的扩展及变形的功能主体，具体请参见本文中对帧间预测方法的介绍，为简洁起见，本文将不再赘述。It should be noted that each module in the inter prediction apparatus of the embodiment of the present application is a functional body that implements various execution steps included in the inter prediction method of the present application, that is, it has The various steps of the steps and the functional body of the expansion and deformation of these steps, please refer to the introduction of the inter prediction method in this article for details. For the sake of brevity, this article will not repeat them.

本领域技术人员能够领会，结合本文公开描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块和算法步骤所描述的功能可以硬件、软件、固件或其任何组合来实施。如果以软件来实施，那么各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤描述的功能可作为一或多个指令或代码在计算机可读媒体上存储或传输，且由基于硬件的处理单元执行。计算机可读媒体可包含计算机可读存储媒体，其对应于有形媒体，例如数据存储媒体，或包括任何促进将计算机程序从一处传送到另一处的媒体(例如，根据通信协议)的通信媒体。以此方式，计算机可读媒体大体上可对应于(1)非暂时性的有形计算机可读存储媒体，或(2)通信媒体，例如信号或载波。数据存储媒体可为可由一或多个计算机或一或多个处理器存取以检索用于实施本申请中描述的技术的指令、代码和/或数据结构的任何可用媒体。计算机程序产品可包含计算机可读媒体。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functions described in conjunction with the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and algorithm steps described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions described by the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps may be stored or transmitted as one or more instructions or codes on a computer-readable medium and executed by hardware-based processing units. Computer-readable media may include computer-readable storage media, which corresponds to tangible media, such as data storage media, or communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another (eg, according to a communication protocol). . In this manner, computer-readable media may generally correspond to (1) non-transitory tangible computer-readable storage media, or (2) communication media, such as signals or carrier waves. Data storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to retrieve instructions, code and/or data structures for implementation of the techniques described in this application. The computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.

作为实例而非限制，此类计算机可读存储媒体可包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其它光盘存储装置、磁盘存储装置或其它磁性存储装置、快闪存储器或可用来存储指令或数据结构的形式的所要程序代码并且可由计算机存取的任何其它媒体。并且，任何连接被恰当地称作计算机可读媒体。举例来说，如果使用同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、数字订户线(DSL)或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术从网站、服务器或其它远程源传输指令，那么同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、DSL或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术包含在媒体的定义中。但是，应理解，所述计算机可读存储媒体和数据存储媒体并不包括连接、载波、信号或其它暂时媒体，而是实际上针对于非暂时性有形存储媒体。如本文中所使用，磁盘和光盘包含压缩光盘(CD)、激光光盘、光学光盘、数字多功能光盘(DVD)和蓝光光盘，其中磁盘通常以磁性方式再现数据，而光盘利用激光以光学方式再现数据。以上各项的组合也应包含在计算机可读媒体的范围内。By way of example, and not limitation, such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM, or other optical disk storage devices, magnetic disk storage devices, or other magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or may be used to store instructions or data structures The desired program code in the form of and any other medium that can be accessed by the computer. And, any connection is properly called a computer-readable medium. For example, if a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technology such as infrared, radio, and microwave is used to transmit instructions from a website, server, or other remote source, then the coaxial cable Wire, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of media. However, it should be understood that the computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other temporary media, but are actually directed to non-transitory tangible storage media. As used herein, magnetic disks and optical discs include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), and Blu-ray discs, where magnetic discs typically reproduce data magnetically, while optical discs reproduce optically using lasers data. Combinations of the above should also be included in the scope of computer-readable media.

可通过例如一或多个数字信号处理器(DSP)、通用微处理器、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程逻辑阵列(FPGA)或其它等效集成或离散逻辑电路等一或多个处理器来执行指令。因此，如本文中所使用的术语“处理器”可指前述结构或适合于实施本文中所描述的技术的任一其它结构中的任一者。另外，在一些方面中，本文中所描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤所描述的功能可以提供于经配置以用于编码和解码的专用硬件和/或软件模块内，或者并入在组合编解码器中。而且，所述技术可完全实施于一或多个电路或逻辑元件中。One or more processes such as one or more digital signal processors (DSPs), general purpose microprocessors, application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable logic arrays (FPGAs), or other equivalent integrated or discrete logic circuits To execute instructions. Accordingly, the term "processor" as used herein may refer to any of the foregoing structure or any other structure suitable for implementation of the techniques described herein. In addition, in some aspects, the functions described in the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps described herein may be provided within dedicated hardware and/or software modules configured for encoding and decoding, or in combination Into the combined codec. Moreover, the techniques can be fully implemented in one or more circuits or logic elements.

本申请的技术可在各种各样的装置或设备中实施，包含无线手持机、集成电路(IC)或一组IC(例如，芯片组)。本申请中描述各种组件、模块或单元是为了强调用于执行所揭示的技术的装置的功能方面，但未必需要由不同硬件单元实现。实际上，如上文所描述，各种单元可结合合适的软件和/或固件组合在编码解码器硬件单元中，或者通过互操作硬件单元(包含如上文所描述的一或多个处理器)来提供。The technology of the present application may be implemented in a variety of devices or equipment, including wireless handsets, integrated circuits (ICs), or a set of ICs (eg, chipsets). Various components, modules or units are described in this application to emphasize the functional aspects of the device for performing the disclosed technology, but do not necessarily need to be implemented by different hardware units. In fact, as described above, various units may be combined in a codec hardware unit in combination with suitable software and/or firmware, or by interoperating hardware units (including one or more processors as described above) provide.

在上述实施例中，对各个实施例的描述各有侧重，某个实施例中没有详述的部分，可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。In the above embodiments, the description of each embodiment has its own emphasis. For a part that is not detailed in an embodiment, you can refer to the related descriptions of other embodiments.

以上所述，仅为本申请示例性的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到的变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应该以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only exemplary specific implementations of the present application, but the scope of protection of the present application is not limited to this, and any person skilled in the art may easily think of changes or changes within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. Replacement should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims

一种视频解码方法，其特征在于，包括：A video decoding method, characterized in that it includes:

获取当前图像块的块信息；Get the block information of the current image block;

根据所述块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，所述可选划分方式集合包括不划分方式；Determine whether the division modes in the optional division mode set are available according to the block information, and the optional division mode set includes no division mode;

从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定所述当前图像块的划分方式；Determine the division mode of the current image block from the determined available division modes;

根据所述当前图像块的划分方式从所述当前图像块得到一个编码单元CU或多个CU，其中所述一个CU是应用所述不划分方式由当前图像块得到的；Obtaining a coding unit CU or multiple CUs from the current image block according to the division method of the current image block, wherein the one CU is obtained from the current image block by applying the non-division method;

解析包含所述当前图像块的码流获取所述一个CU或所述多个CU的解码信息，并根据所述解码信息对所述CU解码得到重建块。Parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of the one CU or the multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.
根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述可选划分方式集合还包括水平二叉树HBT划分方式，垂直二叉树VBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和四叉树QT划分方式。The method according to claim 1, wherein the set of optional division methods further includes a horizontal binary tree HBT division method, a vertical binary tree VBT division method, a horizontally expanded quadtree HEQT division method, and a vertically extended quadtree VEQT division method Mode and quadtree QT division mode.
根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，根据所述块信息确定所述不划分方式是否可用，包括：The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein determining whether the non-dividing method is available according to the block information includes:

根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第一判定条件集合中的条件；Judging whether the current image block meets the conditions in the first judgment condition set according to the block information;

若所述当前图像块满足所述第一判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述不划分方式不可用；If the current image block satisfies at least one condition in the first determination condition set, the non-dividing method is not available;

若所述当前图像块不满足所述第一判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述不划分方式可用；If the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the first judgment condition set, the non-dividing method is available;

其中，所述第一判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the first set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为最大编码单元LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the largest coding unit LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的长边与短边的比值大于maxAspectRatio，maxAspectRatio为大于等于1的整数；(2) The ratio of the long side to the short side of the current image block is greater than maxAspectRatio, and maxAspectRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(3)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界；(3) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(4)所述当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于等于16的整数；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than pipelineSize, and pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(5)所述当前图像块的高大于pipelineSize，且宽小于pipelineSize。(5) The height of the current image block is larger than the pipelineSize, and the width is smaller than the pipelineSize.
根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，根据所述块信息确定确定所述HBT划分方式是否可用，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein determining whether the HBT division method is available according to the block information includes:

根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第二判定条件集合中的条件；Judging whether the current image block meets the conditions in the second judgment condition set according to the block information;

若所述当前图像块满足所述第二判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述HBT划分方式不可用；If the current image block satisfies at least one condition in the second determination condition set, the HBT division method is not available;

若所述当前图像块不满足所述第二判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述HBT划分方式可用；If the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the second judgment condition set, the HBT division method is available;

其中，所述第二判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the second judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU， MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, and MaxLCU is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且所述当前图像块的宽大于K，高等于K，K包括128、64、32、16、8或4；(3) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width of the current image block is greater than K, and the height is equal to K, where K includes 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4;

(4)所述当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than or equal to pipelineSize, and pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(5)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界或右下边界；(5) The current image block exceeds the right or lower right border of the image where the current image block is located;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于8的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 8;

(7)所述当前图像块的高等于最小CU边长；(7) The height of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块未超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the width and height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(9) The ratio of the width to the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(10)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(10) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述块信息确定所述VBT划分方式是否可用，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining whether the VBT division method is available according to the block information includes:

根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第三判定条件集合中的条件；Judging whether the current image block meets the conditions in the third judgment condition set according to the block information;

若所述当前图像块满足所述第三判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述VBT划分方式不可用；If the current image block satisfies at least one condition in the third determination condition set, the VBT division method is not available;

若所述当前图像块不满足所述第三判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述VBT划分方式可用；If the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the third determination condition set, the VBT division method is available;

其中，所述第三判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the third set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界或右下边界；(3) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary or lower right boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(4)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且所述当前图像块的宽等于K，高大于K，K包括128、64、32、16、8或4；(4) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width of the current image block is equal to K, and the height is greater than K, where K includes 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4;

(5)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于1；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)所述当前图像块的宽等于最小CU边长；(7) The width of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块未超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的高与宽的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the height to the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)所述当前图像块的高大于pipelineSize，且宽小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数；(9) The height of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the width is less than or equal to pipelineSize, and pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(10)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于 maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(10) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述块信息确定所述HEQT划分方式是否可用，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining whether the HEQT division method is available according to the block information includes:

根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第四判定条件集合中的条件；Judging whether the current image block meets the conditions in the fourth judgment condition set according to the block information;

若所述当前图像块满足所述第四判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述HEQT划分方式不可用；If the current image block satisfies at least one condition in the fourth determination condition set, the HEQT division method is not available;

若所述当前图像块不满足所述第四判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述HEQT划分方式可用；If the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the fourth determination condition set, the HEQT division method is available;

其中，所述第四判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the fourth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(3) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(4)所述当前图像块超过所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N或M×128，M和N分别为小于128的自然数；(4) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the size of the current image block is 128×N or M×128, and M and N are natural numbers less than 128, respectively;

(5)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxEQTSize，maxEQTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxEQTSize, and maxEQTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)所述当前图像块的高小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者宽等于minCUSize，minCUSize为最小CU边长；(7) The height of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the width is equal to minCUSize, and minCUSize is the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatioEQT，maxRatioEQT为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The ratio of the width to the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatioEQT, and maxRatioEQT is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界；(9) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(10)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(10) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述块信息确定所述VEQT划分方式是否可用，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining whether the VEQT division method is available according to the block information includes:

根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第五判定条件集合中的条件；Determine whether the current image block satisfies the conditions in the fifth determination condition set according to the block information;

若所述当前图像块满足所述第五判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述VEQT划分方式不可用；If the current image block satisfies at least one condition in the fifth determination condition set, the VEQT division method is not available;

若所述当前图像块不满足所述第五判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述VEQT划分方式可用；If the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the fifth determination condition set, the VEQT division method is available;

其中，所述第五判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the fifth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(3) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(4)所述当前图像块超过所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N或M×128，M和N分别为小于128的自然数；(4) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the size of the current image block is 128×N or M×128, M and N are natural numbers less than 128, respectively;

(5)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于1；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxEQTSize，maxEQTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxEQTSize, and maxEQTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)所述当前图像块的宽小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者高等于minCUSize，minCUSize为最小CU边长；(7) The width of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the height is equal to minCUSize, and minCUSize is the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界；(8) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(9)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(9) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述块信息确定所述QT划分方式是否可用，包括：The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining whether the QT division method is available according to the block information includes:

根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第六判定条件集合中的条件；Judging whether the current image block meets the conditions in the sixth judgment condition set according to the block information;

若所述当前图像块满足所述第六判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述QT划分方式不可用；If the current image block satisfies at least one condition in the sixth determination condition set, the QT division method is not available;

若所述当前图像块不满足所述第六判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述QT划分方式可用；If the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the sixth determination condition set, the QT division method is available;

其中，所述第六判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the sixth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(1) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(3) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(4)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于；(4) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to;

(5)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长小于minQtSize，minQtSize为大于或等于4的整数；(5) At least one side length of the current image block is less than minQtSize, and minQtSize is an integer greater than or equal to 4;

(6)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于0；(6) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than 0;

(7)所述当前图像块超过所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界或右边界。(7) The current image block exceeds the lower or right boundary of the image where the current image block is located.
根据权利要求1-8中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定所述当前图像块的划分方式，包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein the determining the division mode of the current image block from the determined available division modes includes:

根据所述可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定所述当前图像块的划分方式；或者，Determine the division mode of the current image block according to the judgment result of whether division modes in the set of optional division modes are available; or,

解析所述码流以确定所述当前图像块的划分方式。Parse the code stream to determine how to divide the current image block.
根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定所述当前图像块的划分方式，包括：The method according to claim 9, wherein the determining the division mode of the current image block according to the determination result of whether division modes in the selectable division mode set are available includes:

若QT划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述QT划分方式；If a QT division mode is available, and all division modes in the set of selectable division modes except the QT division mode are unavailable, the division mode of the current image block is the QT division mode;

若所述QT划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析所述码流以确定所述当前图像块的划分方式。If the QT division mode is available, and at least one division mode other than the QT division mode is available in the set of optional division modes, the code stream is parsed to determine the division mode of the current image block.
根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述QT划分方式不可用，则所述根据所述可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定所述当前图像块的划分方式，还包括：The method according to claim 10, characterized in that, if the QT division method is not available, the determination of whether the current image block is determined according to the determination result of whether the division method in the set of optional division methods is available Ways also include:

若所述不划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述不划分方式和所述QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述不划分方式；If the non-division method is available, and all the division methods in the set of optional division methods except the non-division method and the QT division method are unavailable, the division method of the current image block is the No division method;

若所述不划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述不划分方式和所述QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析所述码流以确定所述当前图像块的划分方式。If the non-division mode is available, and at least one division mode other than the non-division mode and the QT division mode is available in the set of optional division modes, the code stream is parsed to determine the current image block The way of division.
根据权利要求1-11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述当前图像块的划分方式从所述当前图像块得到一个CU或多个CU，包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-11, wherein the obtaining one or more CUs from the current image block according to the division method of the current image block includes:

当所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述不划分方式时，所述当前图像块为一个所述CU；When the division mode of the current image block is the non-division mode, the current image block is one CU;

当所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述可选划分方式集合中除所述不划分方式外的任一划分方式时，根据所述当前图像块的划分方式对所述当前图像块进行划分，若划分得到的子块的至少一个边长为T，T为4或8，则所述子块为一个所述CU，否则对所述子块继续划分。When the division mode of the current image block is any division mode other than the non-division mode in the set of optional division modes, dividing the current image block according to the division mode of the current image block, If at least one side length of the divided sub-block is T, and T is 4 or 8, the sub-block is one CU, otherwise, the sub-block is further divided.
一种视频解码方法，其特征在于，包括：A video decoding method, characterized in that it includes:

获取当前图像块的块信息；Get the block information of the current image block;

根据所述块信息确定所述当前图像块的默认划分方式；Determine the default division method of the current image block according to the block information;

对所述当前图像块采用所述默认划分方式进行划分得到多个编码单元CU；Dividing the current image block by using the default division method to obtain multiple coding units CU;

解析包含所述当前图像块的码流获取所述多个CU的解码信息，并根据所述解码信息对所述CU解码得到重建块。The code stream containing the current image block is parsed to obtain decoding information of the multiple CUs, and the CU is decoded according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.
根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述块信息确定所述当前图像块的默认划分方式，包括：The method according to claim 13, wherein the determining the default division mode of the current image block according to the block information comprises:

根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第七判定条件集合中的条件；Judging whether the current image block meets the conditions in the seventh judgment condition set according to the block information;

若所述当前图像块满足所述第七判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述默认划分方式为四叉树QT划分方式；If the current image block satisfies at least one condition in the seventh determination condition set, the default division mode is a quadtree QT division mode;

其中，所述第七判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the seventh judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右下边界；(1) The current image block exceeds the lower right border of the image where the current image block is located;

(2)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的宽和高分别等于maxLCU，maxLCU包括64、128或者256。(2) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to maxLCU, respectively, and maxLCU includes 64, 128, or 256.
根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述块信息确定所述当前图像块的默认划分方式，包括：The method according to claim 13, wherein the determining the default division mode of the current image block according to the block information comprises:

根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第八判定条件集合中的条件；Determine whether the current image block satisfies the conditions in the eighth determination condition set according to the block information;

若所述当前图像块满足所述第八判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述默认划分方式为垂直二叉树VBT划分方式；If the current image block satisfies at least one condition in the eighth judgment condition set, the default division mode is a vertical binary tree VBT division mode;

其中，所述第八判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the eighth determination condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高不满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, and K is less than L, K And L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively, and the current image block is forced to use the VBT division method;

(2)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, K is greater than L, K and L is an integer greater than or equal to 32, and the current image block is forced to use the VBT division method.
根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述块信息确定所述当前图像块的默认划分方式，包括：The method according to claim 13, wherein the determining the default division mode of the current image block according to the block information comprises:

根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第九判定条件集合中的条件；Determine whether the current image block satisfies the conditions in the ninth determination condition set according to the block information;

若所述当前图像块满足所述第九判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述默认划分方式为水平二叉树HBT划分方式；If the current image block satisfies at least one condition in the ninth determination condition set, the default division mode is a horizontal binary tree HBT division mode;

其中，所述第九判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the ninth determination condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高不满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, and K is greater than L, K And L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively, and the current image block is forced to use the HBT division method;

(2)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, K is less than L, K and L is an integer greater than or equal to 32, and the current image block is forced to use the HBT division method.
根据权利要求13-16中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述获取当前图像块的块信息之后，还包括：The method according to any one of claims 13-16, wherein after acquiring the block information of the current image block, the method further comprises:

根据所述块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，所述可选划分方式集合包括VBT划分方式，HBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和QT划分方式；According to the block information, determine whether the division modes in the optional division mode set are available. The optional division mode set includes a VBT division mode, an HBT division mode, a horizontally expanded quadtree HEQT division mode, and a vertically extended quadtree VEQT division mode. Method and QT division method;

从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定所述当前图像块的划分方式；Determine the division mode of the current image block from the determined available division modes;

对所述当前图像块采用所述当前图像块的划分方式进行划分得到多个CU；Dividing the current image block by using the current image block division method to obtain multiple CUs;

解析所述码流获取所述多个CU的解码信息，并根据所述解码信息对所述CU解码得到重建块。Parse the code stream to obtain decoding information of the multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.
一种视频解码装置，其特征在于，包括：A video decoding device is characterized by comprising:

获取模块，用于获取当前图像块的块信息；The acquisition module is used to acquire the block information of the current image block;

判断模块，用于根据所述块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，所述可选划分方式集合包括不划分方式；A judgment module, configured to determine whether the division modes in the optional division mode set are available according to the block information, and the optional division mode set includes no division mode;

确定模块，用于从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定所述当前图像块的划分方式；A determining module, configured to determine the dividing mode of the current image block from the determined available dividing modes;

划分模块，用于根据所述当前图像块的划分方式从所述当前图像块得到一个编码单元CU或多个CU，其中所述一个CU是应用所述不划分方式由当前图像块得到的；A dividing module, configured to obtain one coding unit CU or a plurality of CUs from the current image block according to the dividing mode of the current image block, wherein the one CU is obtained from the current image block by applying the non-dividing mode;

解码模块，用于解析包含所述当前图像块的码流获取所述一个CU或所述多个CU的解码信息，并根据所述解码信息对所述CU解码得到重建块。The decoding module is configured to parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of the one CU or the multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.
根据权利要求18所述的装置，其特征在于，所述可选划分方式集合还包括水平二叉树HBT划分方式，垂直二叉树VBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和四叉树QT划分方式。The apparatus according to claim 18, wherein the set of selectable division modes further includes a horizontal binary tree HBT division mode, a vertical binary tree VBT division mode, a horizontally expanded quadtree HEQT division mode, and a vertically expanded quadtree VEQT division mode Mode and quadtree QT division mode.
根据权利要求18或19所述的装置，其特征在于，所述判断模块，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第一判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第一判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述不划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第一判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述不划分方式可用；The apparatus according to claim 18 or 19, wherein the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the first judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image If a block satisfies at least one condition in the first judgment condition set, the non-dividing method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all conditions in the first judgment condition set, the non-dividing method Available

其中，所述第一判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the first set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU， MaxLCU为最大编码单元LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, and MaxLCU is the side length of the largest coding unit LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的长边与短边的比值大于maxAspectRatio，maxAspectRatio为大于等于1的整数；(2) The ratio of the long side to the short side of the current image block is greater than maxAspectRatio, and maxAspectRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(3)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界；(3) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(4)所述当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于等于16的整数；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than pipelineSize, and pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(5)所述当前图像块的高大于pipelineSize，且宽小于pipelineSize。(5) The height of the current image block is larger than the pipelineSize, and the width is smaller than the pipelineSize.
根据权利要求19所述的装置，其特征在于，所述判断模块，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第二判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第二判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述HBT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第二判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述HBT划分方式可用；The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the second judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets At least one condition in the second determination condition set, the HBT division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the second determination condition set, the HBT division method is available;

其中，所述第二判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the second judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且所述当前图像块的宽大于K，高等于K，K包括128、64、32、16、8或4；(3) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width of the current image block is greater than K, and the height is equal to K, where K includes 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4;

(4)所述当前图像块的宽大于pipelineSize，且高小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数；(4) The width of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the height is less than or equal to pipelineSize, and pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(5)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界或右下边界；(5) The current image block exceeds the right or lower right border of the image where the current image block is located;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于8的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 8;

(7)所述当前图像块的高等于最小CU边长；(7) The height of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块未超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the width and height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(9) The ratio of the width to the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(10)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(10) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
根据权利要求19所述的装置，其特征在于，所述判断模块，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第三判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第三判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述VBT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第三判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述VBT划分方式可用；The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the third judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets At least one condition in the third determination condition set, the VBT division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the third determination condition set, the VBT division method is available;

其中，所述第三判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the third set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界或右下边界；(3) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary or lower right boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(4)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且所述当前图像块的宽等于K，高大于K，K包括128、64、32、16、8或4；(4) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width of the current image block is equal to K, and the height is greater than K, where K includes 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, or 4;

(5)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于1；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxBTSize，maxBTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxBTSize, and maxBTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)所述当前图像块的宽等于最小CU边长；(7) The width of the current image block is equal to the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块未超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的高与宽的比值大于或等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The current image block does not exceed the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the ratio of the height to the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)所述当前图像块的高大于pipelineSize，且宽小于或等于pipelineSize，pipelineSize为大于或等于1的整数；(9) The height of the current image block is greater than pipelineSize, and the width is less than or equal to pipelineSize, and pipelineSize is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(10)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(10) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
根据权利要求19所述的装置，其特征在于，所述判断模块，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第四判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第四判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述HEQT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第四判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述HEQT划分方式可用；The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block satisfies the conditions in the fourth judgment condition set based on the block information; if the current image block meets At least one condition in the fourth determination condition set, the HEQT division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the fourth determination condition set, the HEQT division method is available;

其中，所述第四判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the fourth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU，MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, which is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(3) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(4)所述当前图像块超过所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N或M×128，M和N分别为小于128的自然数；(4) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the size of the current image block is 128×N or M×128, and M and N are natural numbers less than 128, respectively;

(5)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxEQTSize，maxEQTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxEQTSize, and maxEQTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)所述当前图像块的高小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者宽等于minCUSize，minCUSize为最小CU边长；(7) The height of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the width is equal to minCUSize, and minCUSize is the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值大于或等于maxRatioEQT，maxRatioEQT为大于或等于1的整数；(8) The ratio of the width to the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to maxRatioEQT, and maxRatioEQT is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(9)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界；(9) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(10)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(10) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
根据权利要求19所述的装置，其特征在于，所述判断模块，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第五判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第五判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述VEQT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第五判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述VEQT划分方式可用；The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block meets the conditions in the fifth judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets At least one condition in the fifth determination condition set, the VEQT division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the fifth determination condition set, the VEQT division method is available;

其中，所述第五判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the fifth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的边长等于MaxLCU， MaxLCU为LCU的边长；(1) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the side length of the current image block is equal to MaxLCU, and MaxLCU is the side length of the LCU;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(3) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(4)所述当前图像块超过所述当前图像块所在图像的边界，且所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N或M×128，M和N分别为小于128的自然数；(4) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the size of the current image block is 128×N or M×128, and M and N are natural numbers less than 128, respectively;

(5)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于1；(5) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1;

(6)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长大于maxEQTSize，maxEQTSize为大于或等于16的整数；(6) At least one side length of the current image block is greater than maxEQTSize, and maxEQTSize is an integer greater than or equal to 16;

(7)所述当前图像块的宽小于或等于minCUSize×2，或者高等于minCUSize，minCUSize为最小CU边长；(7) The width of the current image block is less than or equal to minCUSize×2, or the height is equal to minCUSize, and minCUSize is the minimum CU side length;

(8)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的边界；(8) The current image block exceeds the boundary of the image where the current image block is located;

(9)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于或等于maxBTTDepth，maxBTTDepth为大于或等于1的整数。(9) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than or equal to maxBTTDepth, and maxBTTDepth is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
根据权利要求19所述的装置，其特征在于，所述判断模块，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第六判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第六判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述QT划分方式不可用；若所述当前图像块不满足所述第六判定条件集合中的所有条件，则所述QT划分方式可用；The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the judgment module is specifically configured to judge whether the current image block satisfies the conditions in the sixth judgment condition set according to the block information; if the current image block meets At least one condition in the sixth determination condition set, the QT division method is unavailable; if the current image block does not satisfy all the conditions in the sixth determination condition set, the QT division method is available;

其中，所述第六判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the sixth set of judgment conditions includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块的尺寸为128×N，N为小于128的自然数；(1) The size of the current image block is 128×N, and N is a natural number less than 128;

(2)所述当前图像块的尺寸为M×128，M为小于128的自然数；(2) The size of the current image block is M×128, and M is a natural number less than 128;

(3)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于maxRatio，maxRatio为大于或等于1的整数；(3) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to maxRatio, and maxRatio is an integer greater than or equal to 1;

(4)所述当前图像块的宽与高的比值等于minRatio，minRatio大于0且小于或等于；(4) The ratio of the width and height of the current image block is equal to minRatio, minRatio is greater than 0 and less than or equal to;

(5)所述当前图像块的至少一个边长小于minQtSize，minQtSize为大于或等于4的整数；(5) At least one side length of the current image block is less than minQtSize, and minQtSize is an integer greater than or equal to 4;

(6)所述当前图像块进行二叉树划分和/或扩展四叉树划分的层次大于0；(6) The level of the current image block for binary tree division and/or extended quadtree division is greater than 0;

(7)所述当前图像块超过所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界或右边界。(7) The current image block exceeds the lower or right boundary of the image where the current image block is located.
根据权利要求18-25中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述确定模块，具体用于根据所述可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用的判定结果确定所述当前图像块的划分方式；或者，解析所述码流以确定所述当前图像块的划分方式。The apparatus according to any one of claims 18-25, wherein the determination module is specifically configured to determine the current image block according to a determination result of whether a division mode in the set of optional division modes is available Partitioning method; or, parsing the code stream to determine the partitioning method of the current image block.
根据权利要求26所述的装置，其特征在于，所述确定模块，具体用于若QT划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述QT划分方式；若所述QT划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析所述码流以确定所述当前图像块的划分方式。The apparatus according to claim 26, wherein the determining module is specifically configured to, if a QT division mode is available, and all division modes in the set of selectable division modes except the QT division mode are unavailable , Then the division method of the current image block is the QT division method; if the QT division method is available, and at least one division method other than the QT division method is available in the set of optional division methods, then parse The code stream to determine how to divide the current image block.
根据权利要求27所述的装置，其特征在于，若所述QT划分方式不可用，则所述确定模块，还用于若所述不划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述不划分方式和所述QT划分方式外的所有划分方式均不可用，则所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述不划分方式；若所述不划分方式可用，且所述可选划分方式集合中除所述不划分方式和所述QT划分方式外的至少一个划分方式可用，则解析所述码流以确定所述当前图像块的划分方式。The apparatus according to claim 27, wherein if the QT division method is unavailable, the determining module is further used to divide the set of optional division modes if the undivided mode is available All the division modes except the QT division mode and the QT division mode are unavailable, the division mode of the current image block is the division mode; if the division mode is available, and the optional division mode At least one division mode other than the non-division mode and the QT division mode in the set is available, then the code stream is parsed to determine the division mode of the current image block.
根据权利要求18-28中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述划分模块，具体用于当所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述不划分方式时，所述当前图像块为一个所述CU；当所述当前图像块的划分方式为所述可选划分方式集合中除所述不划分方式外的任一划分方式时，根据所述当前图像块的划分方式对所述当前图像块进行划分，若划分得到的子块的至少一个边长为T，T为4或8，则所述子块为一个所述CU，否则对所述子块继续划分。The apparatus according to any one of claims 18 to 28, wherein the dividing module is specifically configured to: when the dividing mode of the current image block is the non-dividing mode, the current image block is One of the CUs; when the division mode of the current image block is any division mode other than the non-division mode in the set of selectable division modes, according to the division mode of the current image block The image block is divided. If at least one side length of the divided sub-block is T, and T is 4 or 8, the sub-block is one CU, otherwise, the sub-block is further divided.
一种视频解码装置，其特征在于，包括：A video decoding device is characterized by comprising:

获取模块，用于获取当前图像块的块信息；The acquisition module is used to acquire the block information of the current image block;

默认模块，用于根据所述块信息确定所述当前图像块的默认划分方式；A default module, used to determine the default division method of the current image block according to the block information;

划分模块，用于对所述当前图像块采用所述默认划分方式进行划分得到多个编码单元CU；A dividing module, configured to divide the current image block by using the default dividing manner to obtain multiple coding units CU;

解码模块，用于解析包含所述当前图像块的码流获取所述多个CU的解码信息，并根据所述解码信息对所述CU解码得到重建块。The decoding module is configured to parse the code stream containing the current image block to obtain decoding information of the multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstructed block.
根据权利要求30所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认模块，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第七判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第七判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述默认划分方式为四叉树QT划分方式；The apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the default module is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block meets the conditions in the seventh judgment condition set based on the block information; if the current image block meets At least one condition in the seventh determination condition set, the default division mode is a quadtree QT division mode;

其中，所述第七判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the seventh judgment condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右下边界；(1) The current image block exceeds the lower right border of the image where the current image block is located;

(2)所述当前图像块为I条带或者I帧，且所述当前图像块的宽和高分别等于maxLCU，maxLCU包括64、128或者256。(2) The current image block is an I-slice or I frame, and the width and height of the current image block are equal to maxLCU, respectively, and maxLCU includes 64, 128, or 256.
根据权利要求30所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认模块，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第八判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第八判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述默认划分方式为垂直二叉树VBT划分方式；The apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the default module is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block meets the conditions in the eighth determination condition set based on the block information; if the current image block meets At least one condition in the eighth determination condition set, the default division mode is a vertical binary tree VBT division mode;

其中，所述第八判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the eighth determination condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高不满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, and K is less than L, K And L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively, and the current image block is forced to use the VBT division method;

(2)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用VBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, K is greater than L, K and L is an integer greater than or equal to 32, and the current image block is forced to use the VBT division method.
根据权利要求30所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认模块，具体用于根据所述块信息判断所述当前图像块是否满足第九判定条件集合中的条件；若所述当前图像块满足所述第九判定条件集合中的至少一个条件，则所述默认划分方式为水平二叉树HBT划分方式；The apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the default module is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block satisfies the conditions in the ninth determination condition set based on the block information; if the current image block meets At least one condition in the ninth determination condition set, the default division mode is a horizontal binary tree HBT division mode;

其中，所述第九判定条件集合包括以下一个或多个条件：Wherein, the ninth determination condition set includes one or more of the following conditions:

(1)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的下边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高不满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K大于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式；(1) The current image block exceeds the lower boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block do not satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, and K is greater than L, K And L are integers greater than or equal to 32, respectively, and the current image block is forced to use the HBT division method;

(2)所述当前图像块超出所述当前图像块所在图像的右边界，且所述当前图像块的宽和高满足：所述宽等于K，所述高等于L，K小于L，K和L分别为大于或等于32的整数，所述当前图像块强制使用HBT划分方式。(2) The current image block exceeds the right boundary of the image where the current image block is located, and the width and height of the current image block satisfy: the width is equal to K, the height is equal to L, K is less than L, K and L is an integer greater than or equal to 32, and the current image block is forced to use the HBT division method.
根据权利要求30-33中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，还包括：The device according to any one of claims 30-33, further comprising:

判断模块，用于根据所述块信息确定可选划分方式集合中的划分方式是否可用，所述可选划分方式集合包括VBT划分方式，HBT划分方式，水平扩展四叉树HEQT划分方式，垂直扩展四叉树VEQT划分方式和QT划分方式；The judgment module is used to determine whether the division modes in the optional division mode set are available according to the block information, the optional division mode set includes a VBT division mode, an HBT division mode, a horizontally expanded quadtree HEQT division mode, and a vertical expansion mode Quadtree VEQT division and QT division;

确定模块，用于从确定出的可用的划分方式中确定所述当前图像块的划分方式；A determining module, configured to determine the dividing mode of the current image block from the determined available dividing modes;

所述划分模块，还用于对所述当前图像块采用所述当前图像块的划分方式进行划分得到多个CU；The dividing module is further configured to divide the current image block by using the current image block division method to obtain multiple CUs;

所述解码模块，还用于解析所述码流获取所述多个CU的解码信息，并根据所述解码信息对所述CU解码得到重建块。The decoding module is further configured to parse the code stream to obtain decoding information of the multiple CUs, and decode the CU according to the decoding information to obtain a reconstruction block.
一种视频解码设备，其特征在于，包括：A video decoding device is characterized by comprising:

相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器，所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行如权利要求1-17中任一项所描述的方法。A non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, the processor calling program code stored in the memory to perform the method as described in any one of claims 1-17.